JP7345786B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a game control means capable of executing a game.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a display as disclosed in Patent Document 1 as a display during a specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249717

However, there is room to improve the display during a specific gaming state to increase the interest of the game.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to increase the interest of gaming in a gaming machine.

In a typical form of the present invention, in a gaming machine comprising a game control means capable of executing a game, and a performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game, the game control means is in a normal game state. and a specific gaming state which is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a first variable display game can be executed as the game based on the first starting memory, A second variable display game can be executed as the game based on the second start memory, and the gaming value given to the player in accordance with the result of the first variable display game in the normal gaming state is The number of executions of the specific gaming state is the first value, and the gaming value given to the player in response to the result of the second variable display game in the specific gaming state is such that the number of executions of the specific gaming state is the first value. The second starting memory occurs in the specific gaming state, and is given to the player in response to the result of the second variable display game during a predetermined period after the end of the specific gaming state. The game value is a second value in which the number of executions of the specific gaming state is different from the first value, and is the sum of the first variable display game and the second variable display game during the specific gaming state. When the first condition that the number of times becomes the first number is satisfied, the specific game state is ended, and the performance control means can start a specific performance mode in the specific game state, and in the specific performance mode, the When the second starting memory does not occur, the predetermined effect to be performed corresponding to the predetermined period after the end of the specific game state is not executed.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to increase the interest of playing a game in a gaming machine.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a production control system of a gaming machine. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change/confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start opening switch common processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of special figure display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of time reduction variation number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of accessory game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of accessory normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common figure game process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of general electricity prize switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal power operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of general electric field remaining bulb processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control device. 7 is a flowchart showing received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart showing prefetch symbol type command processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating prefetch variable command processing. It is a flowchart showing symbol-related command processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command process. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the symbols that are the types of winnings in the special symbol variable display game. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general electric power operation. After the jackpot of symbol A, a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern hit probability), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation), etc. It is. After the jackpot of symbol B, a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern hit probability), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation), etc. It is. After the jackpot of symbol F, a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern hit probability), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation), etc. It is. It is a time chart showing an example 1 of the occurrence of a lag between the start timing of the regular power release and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is a time chart showing example 2 of the occurrence of a lag between the start timing of the regular power release and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is a figure explaining the countermeasure against misalignment. 12 is a time chart showing the effect (effect 1) of the deviation countermeasure against the front deviation. 12 is a time chart showing the effect (effect 2) of the deviation countermeasure against the subsequent deviation. It is a time chart explaining the method of increasing the remaining reservation by stopping. It is a time chart explaining the countermeasure against stopping. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of how to play instruction display. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise change in the display of how-to-play instructions. This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 1). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 2). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 3). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (part 4). This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 1). This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (part 2). Regarding the modification, it is a table showing the support state, the number of time reductions, the specified remaining reservation number, etc. corresponding to the symbols that are the types of hits in the special symbol fluctuation display game. It is a figure which shows the characteristic etc. of a common figure fluctuation display game and a common figure operation|movement regarding a modification. Regarding a modification, it is a diagram (part 1) showing an opening pattern of a normal variable prize winning device (general electricity). Regarding a modification, it is a diagram showing an opening pattern of a normal variable prize winning device (general electricity) (No. 2). Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability, normal pattern state, normal power state, special pattern 2 reservation number, special pattern fluctuation, etc. after the jackpot with symbol B. Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability, normal pattern state, normal power state, special pattern 2 reservation number, special pattern fluctuation, etc. after the jackpot with symbol D. Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability, normal pattern state, normal power state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation, etc. after a jackpot with pattern E or pattern F. Regarding the modification, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 1). Regarding the modification, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (part 2). In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (middle stage) of the screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (second half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition from the time saving state in the 100 time saving machine. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in a modification of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (second half) of the screen transition in a modification of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in modification example 2 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in modification example 3 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in Modifications 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in modification example 6 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition from the time-saving state to the time-saving state after the time-saving state when the occurrence standby display and occurrence effect of the second start memory are performed. (first half). It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition from the time-saving state to the time-saving state after the time-saving state when the occurrence standby display and occurrence effect of the second start memory are performed. (second half). It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the time saving state when the occurrence standby display and non-occurrence effect of the second start memory are performed. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in candidate display performance of jackpot symbols. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition when the movable member operates. It is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in a 4th embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations), etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol fluctuation display game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure display based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process based on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 4th embodiment. It is a block diagram of a game control system in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the non-electric accessory in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the characteristic etc. of a general figure fluctuation display game and general electric power operation|movement in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing in a 4th embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, regarding after the jackpot, the game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern winning probability), normal power state, induction valve state, special pattern 1 winning, special pattern 2 winning, special pattern 1 pending number, special pattern This is an example of a timing chart showing 2 pending numbers, a special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 variation), and a special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 variation). It is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the fourth embodiment with respect to special specifications (specifications) of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining reservation number (regular remaining reservation number), etc., corresponding to the symbol that is the winning type of the special symbol fluctuation display game with special specifications in the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart regarding special specifications in a 4th embodiment. It is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in a 5th embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations), etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol fluctuation display game. It is a front view of the game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and general electric power operation|movement in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the relationship between general power operation and special figure fluctuation in a 5th embodiment. It is a sectional view explaining in detail the operation of the normal variable prize winning device in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the structure of the normal variable prize winning device in 5th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, regarding after the jackpot, the gaming state, the probability of winning a regular symbol (probability of winning a regular symbol), the regular symbol state, the regular power state, the special symbol 1 winning, the special symbol 2 winning, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the special symbol This is an example of a timing chart showing 2 pending numbers, a special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 variation), and a special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 variation). In the fifth embodiment, this is an example of a timing chart showing a case where a predetermined type of specific gaming state is entered again. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing concerning a 5th embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that in the description of the gaming machine, front, rear, left, and right refer to the directions seen from the player during the game.

[Overview of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The opening/closing frame includes a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 while the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. I can do it.

Various frame constituent members are arranged at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, there is a decorative device 1 that can produce light emission depending on the game state.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is disposed at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and at the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b are for emitting sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protrusion unit 13 is provided that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes toward the front (towards the player). Outstanding unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Outstanding appearance unit 13
The lighting member disposed inside the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4) also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed into a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball firing device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a production operation device that accepts input operations from players, a ball rental operation device that accepts input operations from players, and a decoration device 22 that performs light emission production etc. according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated into the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit for easy operation by the player.

By the player operating the performance operation device, it is possible to perform a performance in which the player's operation intervenes in a special figure fluctuation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a performance pattern (performance mode), or to execute a preview performance that foretells in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Incidentally, the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Furthermore, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the variable display game is not being executed.

Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state occurs. In addition, special gaming states include, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state where the probability of a special result (e.g. jackpot) is high in a variable display game (variable probability state, variable probability state), jackpot state (
A special game state) and a small win game state (a small win state).

Here, the variable probability states (specific gaming states) include those that continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), those that continue until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-time type, ST), and There is a type of lottery that continues until you win a lottery with a predetermined probability (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate a variable probability state may not be determined based on the jackpot symbol random number, but instead the variable probability state may be generated whenever a jackpot occurs.

The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device has a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
and a balance display section 26. The ball rental button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and the return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This button is operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 houses lighting members such as LEDs inside, and is a device that performs lighting effects depending on the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The lighting member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown), and a handle capable of storing game balls. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball firing device fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device is set to become faster as the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball firing device has the force (speed) at which the game ball is fired into the game area.
The firing force can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various firing modes with different firing forces. The firing mode includes left-handed hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, and right-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a that vertically passes through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball removal hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removal hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various components.
Equipped with 0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A gaming area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided in front of the game area. The gaming machine 10 is
It is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached that forms a window section that serves as a display area for a variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a production display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner (variable display).
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
An inlet 40a for guiding the ball into the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolling on the stage part 40b is likely to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.

An upper presentation unit 40c and a side presentation unit 40d are provided at the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board presentation device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. Winning of game balls to these general winning holes 35 is performed using a winning hole switch (SW) provided in the general winning hole 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides starting conditions for the special figure variable display game. Center case 40
In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the page, below the normal figure starting gate 34 is a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity) equipped with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area). is provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state where game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37. When the game ball wins in the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that it is easier for a game ball to win in the starting prize opening 36 when the ball is hit to the left, and it is easier to win a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 when the ball is hit to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory, and is operated via the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (an easy winning state that is advantageous for the player) in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of easy-to-win states by shortening the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation display game or making the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which no game is performed, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that even in the variable probability state (excluding the latent variable state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs overlappingly.

In the gaming area 32 to the right of the starting winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7).
A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) is provided which has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that opens the lower big winning hole by retracting from the front to the back side to open the big winning hole. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the big winning hole from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and By facilitating the flow of game balls into the jackpot, a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time reductions/variable probability after winning the prize ball or the jackpot) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower large winning hole, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning hole. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right.

In the gaming area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig.
A second special variable prize winning device 39 is provided which has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the top prize winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right side by the second special variable prize winning device 39. Second special variable prize winning device 39
Converts the grand prize opening from a closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and allows the game ball to enter the grand prize opening. By facilitating the influx of players, a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time savings/the number of guaranteed changes after winning a prize ball or a jackpot) is given to the player. In addition, in the grand prize opening, an upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the said grand prize opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right. Moreover, the lower large winning a prize opening switch 38a and the upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the large winning a prize opening switch 43.

Inside the second special variable winning device 39, a specific area 86 (so-called V winning hole) is provided. A jackpot is determined when a game ball enters a specific area 86 (V winning hole) after the opening/closing door 39c is opened due to a small hit. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 is
Passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 to be described later), etc., and when the V winning is detected, it is determined that the game will move to the jackpot state after the small winning ends, and Information (such as a specific area passing command) indicating that there is a V winning prize is transmitted to the production control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the performance control device 300 can notify the V winning prize on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, by opening the second special variable prize winning device 39 with a small hit, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.
A game ball wins a V prize in a specific area 86 (V winning hole) in the special variable winning device 39, and a jackpot occurs.

General winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of winning hole. Further, in the lower gaming area 32, there is provided an exit opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like. In addition, in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 38, 39 and their vicinity, there are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described below). 46) are arranged.

In addition, outside the gaming area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, special pattern variation display games (special pattern 1 variation display game, special pattern 2 variation display game) and regular pattern variation display games are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming status.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) for the variable display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), etc. The display section 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the variable display section 53 for the normal figure variable display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (on hold) of each variable display game. Memory display unit for informing the number of stored numbers (Special drawing 1 holding display 54, Special drawing 2 holding display 55, Regular drawing holding display 56
) and has. The special figure 1 reservation display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 reservation display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display section 57 (a first game state indicator, a lamp) that informs that the player is playing right-handed (when he should play right-handed) or left-handed (normally playing). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the jackpot probability state changes to the high probability state. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9) displays the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed). A round display section 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment type display parts.
It may be composed of an aggregate of multiple LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as an indicator can be turned on or off (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycled on (one of them). The light may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined intervals starting from one LED, or may be turned on and off (flashing) or cycled by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the regular figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the regular map display 53 and the special map 1 display 5
1. Like the special figure 2 display 52, it can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that repeats lighting and extinguishing as a symbol (fourth special symbol to be described later), and a lamp display unit 2 (LED) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting and extinguishing as a symbol (fourth special symbol to be described later), and a lamp display unit 2 (LED) for starting each special symbol variable display game. (Pending) It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for informing the number of memories. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation times of the variable displays on the special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, and regular figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 are measured by the game control device 100, the lamps of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special drawing 1 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 1 holding (first starting memory number) by a combination of an off state, a lighting state, and a blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special map 2 holding LED 1, special drawing 2 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 2 holding (second starting memory number) depending on the combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. do. The lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but in cases other than the jackpot state (including when a reach described below is occurring on the display device 41), the lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the regular pattern fluctuation display game, and the special pattern fluctuation display game will be explained.

In the game machine 10, a game is played by firing a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball firing device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. placed at various places in the game area 32, and passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, the general prize opening 35, and the starting prize opening. 36, the winnings are won in the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, or they flow into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and are discharged from the gaming area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole enters the payout device. The liquid is discharged to the upper tray 21 through the medium.

The regular figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

Conditions in which the general pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general pattern fluctuation display game is already being played and the relevant general pattern fluctuation display game has not finished, or when the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win and it is normal. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general pattern starting gate 34, if the basic pattern starting memory number (normal pattern pending number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal figure starting memory (normal figure hold) stores a random value for determining a hit for determining the hit or miss of the general figure fluctuation display game, and when this random value for determining a hit matches the judgment value, When the general figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit, a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The ordinary figure fluctuation display game is executed on the ordinary figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure indicator 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit when lit as ordinary identification information (ordinary figure) and indicates a miss when it is turned off. By blinking this LED, it is possible to detect fluctuations in the ordinary identification information. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

If the random figure extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol (ordinary figure) displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time,
By driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is performed. Permissible.

The winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that won the starting winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The winning balls are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the game balls that win in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the starting prize ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, each fluctuation pattern random number, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting winning memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times at most). The number of stored special drawing starting winnings is displayed on the special drawing 1 holding display 54 and special drawing 2 holding display 55 for informing the starting winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting prize opening 36 or the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 pending). . In addition, the game control device 100 controls the special pattern 2 variable display game on the special pattern 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting memory (special pattern 2 starting memory, special pattern 2 pending). Execute.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is done by displaying a predetermined result mode in a fixed manner after variably displaying special symbols (special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

In the decorative special symbol variable display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like described above are displayed on the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ), the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special symbol fluctuating display game is displayed. Furthermore, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variable display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), a fourth special symbol ( 4th symbol) changes. The variable display on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined period of time from the start, with the light turned off in the case of a loss, and with the light turned on in the case of a jackpot or small win.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), as a result of the special figure variable display game. A specific result pattern (special result pattern) is derived depending on the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (
(See FIG. 3), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time the player has the privilege of being able to win many game balls. Granted.

If a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (if the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, resulting in a small win state. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the small hit, but the small win value (small hit judgment value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot judgment value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 operate the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig.
By energizing the (see), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short time.
In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning gaming state) than in the jackpot state (special gaming state), so in the small winning state the player can win more games than in the jackpot state. The value (number of pitches acquired) is low. In addition, in both the small winning state and the jackpot state, the big winning opening is in the open state, but the jackpot state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small winning state may be called the second special gaming state. For simplicity, in this embodiment, the special variable winning device 39 (
The configuration is such that only the special variable winning device 38 (lower large prize opening) is converted to the open state in the jackpot state (including the jackpot state due to V winning during the small winning). explain.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be explained.

A jackpot is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set. In addition, the activation of the conditional device means that the specific area 86
It may also mean that the game ball passed through (V winning). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small lottery, for example. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V win during the small winning state, the conditional device will be activated. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. In addition, the “conditional device” is
This term is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is also used herein with the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the jackpot flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the small winning flag. will be released.

In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but each special figure fluctuation display game is not executed at the same time. It is set as follows. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or they may be executed on the same display. It may also be executed on the device or display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may not be executed at the same time.

In addition, in the following explanation, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with a magnetic detection coil, and when a metal comes close to the coil, a magnetic field is generated. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used that detect game balls using changing phenomena. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (gaming frame) 12 etc. Microswitches with standard contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and includes a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply section 410 that includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a DC 32V voltage, and the like. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power outage, and a power outage monitoring circuit, and provides control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage. The control signal generating section 430 generates and outputs a control signal generating section 430 and the like.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing the model, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are installed on a power supply device 400 or a board separate from the main board, as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to exclude it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read from the gaming microcontroller 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotational operation or the like, thereby making it possible to change probability setting values (setting values) according to settings regarding game conditions (games). Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the jackpot probability or the small winning probability, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings related to gaming conditions (probability setting values) is constituted. Note that another switch instead of the RAM initialization switch 112 may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a unique setting value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10, so that they are placed in a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (power outage recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) where changes can be made and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) where probability setting values can be confirmed.

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area changes to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, Probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, Probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting 4) → Setting 4 (setting 5, probability setting 5) → Setting 5 (setting 6, probability setting 6) → Setting 0 (setting 1) → Setting 1 (setting 2) → It will be changed as follows. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, during the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them within a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (setting the work setting value and the probability setting value to the same numerical value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch). Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed by a performance display device 152 that is, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type if dot Dp is included) display. etc. will be displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control, and stores information related to games (gaming information), and can retain the stored information even if a power outage occurs. It becomes a storage storage means that can store data. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111a to determine a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored in the starting memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (However, special result modes are excluded) may be set as a ready-to-win state, and the remaining variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from the ready-to-reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the systems (types) of reach performances with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach.
Note that the expectation level (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach < Premier reach. Moreover, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility of a jackpot compared to a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

Furthermore, the expectation level of a performance (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if the performance is selected, and the selection rate of the performance when it is a jackpot and the selection rate of that performance when it is not a jackpot (when it is a miss). It can be calculated based on selection rate, etc.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol for determining a small win symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating pattern random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in special symbol fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and non-reach fluctuation displays); , a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a stores the game results (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, CPU11
1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and releases the prize balls. Performs control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the regular figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting prize opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 0V to 5V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
detects passage of the game ball (V winning hole) to the specific area 86 (V winning hole). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects the game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, winning port switch 35a, and large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , detection signals from the specific area switch 72 , remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126 .

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, and a detection signal for detecting a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects a switch 63, a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and vibrations of the gaming machine 10.
A signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the gaming control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow signal. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from the game computer 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that it is full). The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting radio waves, and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken in to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also input directly to the output section 13.
0 ports. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows.

Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RST can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is applied to each port 122, 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine that is an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information so that, for example, the gaming machine can control the gaming. An error signal indicating that this is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test equipment via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

Note that the relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The gaming microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE outputted from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the sight test equipment.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) that opens the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and outputting opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever and opens the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to an external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a general voltage solenoid 37 outputted from the second output port 134.
The first driver (drive circuit) 138a receives the opening/closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, and the current supply for the collective display device 50 is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the side segment line, and a third driver outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, thereby creating a dynamic drive system. L selected sequentially in
Power supply voltage flows to the ED and it is turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication. Note that such data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, similar to a normal general-purpose microprocessor, so ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type if dots Dp is included) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may also be provided at other locations. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of balls ejected.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls)
This is the total of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (big winning opening).

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of balls ejected (or number of balls fired), and (
Calculated as: number of pitches acquired ÷ number of pitches released) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 balls ejected.

For example, the accessory ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the winning slot in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present), during the jackpot state. It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by accessory) obtained by entering the big prize opening (= so-called continuous prize winning ratio). In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the jackpot state and the small win state) obtained by entering the big winning hole out of the total number of winning balls (= big winning hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called accessory ratio (total accessory ratio) )) is fine.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (subboard) will be explained using FIG. 4. Figure 4
1 is a block diagram of the production control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, and controls the sound source LSI 314.
It performs processing such as instructing the playback of sounds, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
31, receive the decoration special figure reservation number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 as a production control command signal (production command). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40)
A board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling movable accessories (such as movable accessories that enhance the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display). Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the aforementioned lamp display device 8.
May contain 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, and a motor in the board production device 44. A function that detects the on/off state of the performance accessories switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume adjustment switch provided in the performance control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of the switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- A DC converter is provided in the production control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the performance control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be explained. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of No. 00 extracts a random value for determining the hit of a common figure based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common figure starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It compares it with the judgment value given and judges whether the game is successful or not.

Then, a common symbol variation display game is displayed on the common symbol display 53, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the ordinary figure display 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined period of time (e.g. , 3 seconds x 2 times) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result pattern of the loss on the normal pattern display 53.

In addition, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined based on the starting memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (performance control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to the production control device 300. Then, a special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 is a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning winning device 37). to do.

In addition, the production control device 300 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. let In the process of generating a special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the big winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the game balls to flow into the big winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the grand prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the grand prize opening. One round (R) is defined as opening the big prize opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a big winning opening/closing control means that controls opening/closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode. Moreover, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. High probability state (definite variable state) is
The probability of a winning result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is achieved based on the result of either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game Both become high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the time saving state, the normal variable winning device 37 may be controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time may be controlled to be in a time saving operating state, and the normal variable winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time saving operating state.
Since the open time of 7 is controlled to be substantially increased, it becomes a general power support state. In addition,
Even in high-probability states (normal probability-variable states) other than latent probability-variable states, power supply support is performed by redundantly switching to the time-saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time (special figure variation time) of the special figure variation display game can also be shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal power is opened) is greater than the first number of times it is opened (for example, two times) for one winning result of the general figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern winning probability) is set to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the short time state, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is brought into the open state by changing one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power open time, and the common figure probability. Allow more time to convert than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state where no special game is played, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. Also,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (the normal figure probability is 0). Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities for the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the device shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on/off states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, a transition is made to a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed. (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 5B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

Also, when the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, it moves to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
AM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is executed and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) and is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (gaming control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the gaming control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the gaming control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001). Furthermore, stack pointer setting processing is executed to set a stack pointer which is the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and firing of game balls is prohibited. After that, the gaming control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 serves as the main control means.
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 starts normally.
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, it delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and activates the slave control devices (payout control device 200, production control device 3).
00, etc.) serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation.

Furthermore, the power supply delay timer is timed using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as checksum of the RAM area, some R
Since it is not necessary to perform calculations excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent complicated control at power-on.

Note that by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it is possible to avoid a situation where the settings key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 operations performed at power-on are not accepted, without having to perform such troublesome operations. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the gaming control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1008).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus. (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the gaming machine waits until the power is cut off.

The gaming control device 100, if a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N")
, updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100
), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). ) (A1012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013 ).

Furthermore, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized. The gaming control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting into the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the gaming control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
(A1014). Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 reads the RAM (RAM 111c here) indicating an abnormality.
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag assuming an abnormality is set in a predetermined register.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6), it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a gaming control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (A1019 result is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM indicates a RAM error.
Clear the abnormality flag (A1020). Thereafter, the process moves to step A1021.

In addition, the gaming control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the check sums do not match. (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether both switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the process of changing probability settings in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
111c) is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-A1037 process during probability setting confirmation (in setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046, the normal power-on processing (power restoration time) is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A1023)
The result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (A1024)
. The production control device 300 that received the main abnormal error notification command is the game control device 10
Notify that 0 abnormalities have occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data (“E1” in FIG. 9(C)) when the game is stopped.
" error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 for display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, on-data of a security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) of an abnormality (A1026). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Thereafter, repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026, wait, and perform the setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process is on standby, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt processing that can execute the special map 1 and 2 game processing and the general map game processing is performed. (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so the games (special pattern fluctuation display game, regular pattern fluctuation display game) cannot be performed.

In this way, the settings change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on operations (on operations) have not been executed, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and the processes A1024 to A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. be.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
2 result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), and the 7-segment when the game is stopped The display data (the error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9(C)) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the ON data of the security signal is output to the external device in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. It is output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that, as described above, even if information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Then step A10
25 and A1026 are repeated and the process waits.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is “Y”)
), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct or not, so clear the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c and set it to the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value "1") (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (A1027 result is “N
"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process moves to step A1034. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the gaming control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the process during probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control device 30.
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process moves to step A1034. In addition, the production control device 300 which received the command for changing the probability setting notifies on the display device 41 etc. that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the gaming control device 100 executes the processes from step A1034 to A1040 as a common process during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The gaming control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Fig. 6B) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

Next, the gaming control device 100 allows an interrupt (A1035). This makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7). Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1037). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power outage occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power outage has not occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The settings confirmation state (settings confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off, the game control device 100 (A1036
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a command to end the notification is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1039). In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether the probability setting has been changing so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changing so far, execute the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042 to A1044. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) Perform normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), the R.A.
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing probability setting values is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Furthermore, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and a configuration in which the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal gaming state), role object ratio, number of balls ejected, etc. be.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), and the process moves to step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the gaming control device 100 (A1
041 result is "N"), and the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on processing (power restoration time) is started and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power restoration (power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. Additionally, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command for power outage recovery corresponding to a process number prepared in order to rationally execute the special game process described below is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), and step A10
The process moves to step 47.

Note that the RAM initialization command sent in the process of step A1044 and the power failure recovery command sent in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a reservation for special drawings 1 and 2. Decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and decorative special figure 2 reserved number command that indicate the number, probability information command that indicates the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and the presence or absence of time saving state, special figure fluctuation in the predetermined production mode It includes a performance number information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power outage recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) that is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. commands). The game control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the production control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and from then on, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the performance.

Note that the RAM initialization commands also include a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The production control device 300 that received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM
Initialization (RAM clear) will be notified for 30 seconds. Further, the commands at the time of power restoration include a screen designation command that designates the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command specified on the screen is used for both special drawings 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuation nor winning occurs).
, is a customer waiting demo command, and otherwise is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the gaming control device 100 starts and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register (TC update permission register). Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is the pattern that defines the

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the gaming control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and extracts the values of the corresponding initial value random numbers (the jackpot symbol random numbers that determine the jackpot symbol). Initial value (jackpot initial value random number), Initial value of small hit pattern random number that determines the small hit pattern (small hit pattern initial value random number) (only when there is a small hit), Hit random number that determines the hit of the regular pattern Save it in a predetermined area of RWM as a starting value (initial value (win initial value random number), initial value of the falling lottery random number used in the falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number), etc.) (A1048),
Enable interrupts (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. There is. however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are processed by timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, for jackpot pattern random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers, we adopt the so-called "initial value change method" in which the starting value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. ing. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated using a counter method such as +1 or 1, or may be updated using a random method in which all values within the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 prohibits interruptions (A1051) and executes performance display editing processing to edit performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory object ratio, ball payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Furthermore, if the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). Thereafter, interrupts are permitted (A1053). This makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processes of steps A1050 to A1054 are repeated until a power outage occurs.

When a power outage occurs (result of A1054 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts processing when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in power failure inspection area 2 (A1057).
1058). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM power is turned off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, processing is executed to prohibit access to the RWM (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of reinsertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the gaming control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the gaming control device 100 receives input from various sensors and switches, receives signals,
That is, input processing for reading the status of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing probability settings nor checking probability settings (A130
4 result is "N"), output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big prize opening solenoid 39b), drive control of LEDs (light emission control), etc., based on output data set in various processes. Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process that outputs the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and further performs a random number update process 1 (A1308), and a random number update process 1 (A1308). Processing 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (the front frame or glass frame is open). (A1310
).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring in the grand prize opening (A1311). When an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by abnormal discharge monitoring processing (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is "Y"), processing from step A1315 onward is executed.

The game control device 100 determines if abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”).
, executes special figure game processing that performs processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game (A1312a).
The details of the special figure game process will be described later. Subsequently, accessory game processing is executed to perform processing related to the opening operation of the lower prize opening of the special variable winning device 38 (A1312b). Note that details of the accessory game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern game process that performs processing related to a normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). Segment LED editing processing is executed to drive the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, which display the special symbol variation game and display various information regarding the game, so as to display desired contents (A1314).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1316).

After that, the gaming control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, abnormal discharge monitoring processing is executed to monitor abnormal discharge from the big prize opening (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is detected based on inputs from the big prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 in the special variable winning device 39. is monitored, and if abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge flag is set. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is transferred to the specific area switch 7.
2 (V prize opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes external information editing processing to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disabled state and register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, interrupts may be enabled after external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform processing to return the register bank designation to register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100 determines that when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “
Y''), sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), lights-off data is set as probability setting value display data (A2403), and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2403).
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the probability setting value for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel, etc., even if the probability setting values are different, if the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) is the same, the display probability setting value will be associated with the jackpot probability (and small winning probability). You can make them the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1034.
It is 28ms (predetermined time). Next, the on-data of the security signal is sent to the external information terminal 71 to notify an abnormality to an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer)).
(A1026). Note that at this point, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an OFF state.

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
If the result is "N"), that is, the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is ended without doing anything.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A2407)
If the result is "Y"), that is, the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated unintentionally if the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When the game control device 100 is not processing the first timer interrupt after turning on the power, (A240
8), it is determined whether there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input, the gaming control device 100 performs (A2409
result is "Y"), the working setting value in the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability setting value area is updated corresponding to the working setting value. Setting values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. Note that when entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but the working setting value of the RAM 111c The probability setting value (work setting value) that is being changed is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
''), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing settings (A1037
If the result is "Y"), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, production control, etc. is changed to an unintended value.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, the inputs of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process regarding the special pattern variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes the starting port switch monitoring process of monitoring winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and a special figure variable display is performed based on the winning. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the game. In addition,
Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the winning (ball entering) of the game ball in the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A2601). Note that details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes the top prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
. In the top prize winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A2603). By updating the special figure game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process moves to step A2619.

If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “
Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure game processing number, and a game branching process according to the special figure game processing number is executed (A2607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
Special figure normal processing that monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary to perform processing during special figure variation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the details of the special figure normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is “1” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
The special figure fluctuation process is executed to set the stop display time of the special figure, set the information necessary to perform the special figure display process, etc. (A2609). For example, in the process during special symbol fluctuation, necessary information such as the symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern are set, and the processing number "2" related to the process during special symbol display is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
A special figure displaying process is executed to set information necessary for transitioning to a jackpot state or a small win state (A2610). For example, in special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is operating is set in the conditional device operation information area, and special figure normal processing is performed. Set the corresponding processing number "0" and save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command and the time before opening of the small hit, and set the processing number "3" related to the process before opening of the small hit.
Set and save in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variable display game is a failure, a process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
A small winning release preprocessing is executed (A2611). For example, in the small hit opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special drawing game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special game processing timer area. The on-data is saved, a small hit opening command is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" related to the small winning opening process is set, and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
The small winning opening process is executed (A2612). For example, in the small hit opening process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “5” in step A2607, the gaming control device 100
Small hit remaining ball processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the small winning remaining ball process, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2614), and then displays the special figure 1 display 51. 51 is executed (A2615). After preparing a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2616), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2617). Next, a lever solenoid control process is executed to control the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during a small hit, and the special symbol game process is ended.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning hole 36 (starting winning hole 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and
It is determined whether there is a prize in (A2703). If there is no prize in the starting prize opening 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing from step A2709 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A2704).

If the gaming control device 100 determines that the game is not in a right-handed gaming state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, if the game state is to hit right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hit instruction notification command is prepared as a performance command (A2705), and a performance command setting process is executed (A2706). In the production command setting process, the production command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the production command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

That is, if it is in the general power support state (time saving state), a right-hand hitting instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed, regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of this embodiment, left-handed players are more likely to win into the starting winning opening 36, and winnings cannot be won into the normal variable winning device 37 unless they are right-handed. Further, unless the ball is hit right-handed, the game ball will not pass through the normal pattern starting gate 34. Therefore, in the general power support state (time saving state), right-handed players are more advantageous than left-handed players, but if there is a prize in the starting prize hole 36 during the general power support state (i.e., during the general power support state) ), a right-handed instruction notification command is sent to the production control device 300 , and the production control device 300 sends a notification (
warning) is executed on the display device 41 or the like by displaying a right-click instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting hole switch common process (A2
708). Then, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) (A2709), execute hard random number acquisition processing (A2710), and check whether there is a winning in the second starting winning hole. Determine (A2711). If there is no prize in the second starting prize opening (
If the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second starting prize opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and is in an open state in which it is possible to win a game ball (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), the process moves to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a normal electric power fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent winnings (for example, 5 winnings), it is determined that the regular electricity fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, game balls cannot be won in the closed state, and game balls can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, this means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of fraudulent winnings (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the normal electricity fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714). , executes the special figure starting port switch common process (A2715), and ends the starting port switch monitoring process. Further, if it is determined in A2713 that a false power supply is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Prevent starting memory from occurring any further.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A
2715) will be explained in detail. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times the starting port signal is output is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (A2903 result is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output frequency area of RWM (A2904), and proceed to step A.
The process moves to step 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process moves to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the number of special symbols pending (the number of starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to an upper limit value (here, 4) It is determined whether or not it is less than (A2905). When the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting opening switch common process is ended. In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (here 4) (result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (number of special figures 1 or 2 reserved) number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special symbols (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, extract the jackpot symbol random number of the special symbol fluctuation display game that starts by detecting the monitoring target starting switch, and R
Save in the WM jackpot symbol random number storage area (A2910). Subsequently, the small winning symbol random number of the special symbol fluctuation display game that is started by the detection of the monitoring target starting port switch is extracted and saved in the small winning symbol random number storage area (A2911).

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, since the jackpot is definitely generated by V winning after the small hit, it is not necessary to use the small winning symbol random number, and step A2911 is an option and does not need to be executed. Moreover, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game, if the starting port switch to be monitored is the starting port 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small winning pattern random number.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2
913). In the special figure pending information judgment process, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information based on the saved jackpot random number and jackpot symbol random number, and a first half variation number (number of pre-reach variation) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are used. and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number (post-reach fluctuation number) is set as a production command. Then, prepare a decoration special figure pending number command corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch and the number of special figures held as a production command (A2914), execute the production command setting process (A2915), and execute the production command setting process (A2915) to Finish the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up memory means for storing up to a predetermined number of start-up memories. Also,
The starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36), with a predetermined number as the upper limit, as a first starting memory. , various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is a small hit (A3001). If the special figure game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that a small hit is occurring. If a small hit is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the conditional device is operating (A30
02). If the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the condition device is in operation.

The game control device 100, when the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is “N”),
It is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, winning in the specific area 86 (
If there is a winning (V), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended.

If the small hit is not in progress (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the conditional device is operating (A3
002 result is "Y"), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003
If the result is "N"), the specific area switch monitoring process ends without doing anything.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the accessory game processing described later, and
It is determined whether the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0 (A3200). If the accessory is not normally being processed or if the remaining ball counter in the grand prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N"
”), the process moves to step A3215 without starting the special figure fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 is processing the accessory normally, and the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0.
If so (result of A3200 is "Y"), it is determined whether the number of special drawings 2 pending (second starting memory number) is 0 or not (A3201). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 0 (result of A3201 is "Y"), determine whether the number of reserved special drawings 1 (first starting memory number) is 0 or not (A3206)
. Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 0 (result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A32
11 result is "N"), sets the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (A
3212).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a performance command (
A3213), performance command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process moves to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A32
11 result is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215
), saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3216), and clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3217). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 pending is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N
''), executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations as a production command (A3203
), executes production command setting processing (A3204). Then, the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In the special figure 2 special figure fluctuation process transition setting process, set "1" as the process number, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, clear the customer waiting demo flag area, and set the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. Save the changing flag in the area.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N
''), executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations as a production command (A3208
), executes production command setting processing (A3209). Then, the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process for special figure 1, set "1" as the process number, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, clear the customer waiting demo flag area, and set the special figure 1 variation control flag. Save the changing flag in the area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game will be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority consumption). In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory into the variable display game based on the first start memory. It serves as a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is to be executed in priority to the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure 1 reservation priority is given, the determination in step A3201 is made if the number of special figure 1 reservations ≠ 0. It is only necessary to determine whether or not.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special figure normal process will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol 1 variation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process is executed in which loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a loss or jackpot, and the loss stop symbol pattern or jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a performance command, and a performance command setting process is executed. In addition, round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stopped symbol number and probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number are acquired and saved.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set a variation pattern (variation pattern number) that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
. Next, the game control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to a variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is performed. In addition, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special symbols related to the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the special symbol variable display game to be started from now is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be explained. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 12, but is performed on the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first selects the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating 2 is saved in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 2 setting process is executed in which loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, special figure information setting processing is executed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3504). Next, a special figure 2 variable pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, a variation start information setting process is executed to set information on the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3507), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the jackpot flag 1.

The game control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36).
01). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1), prepare it (A3602), and clear the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0. (A3603). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (A3604).

If the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3605) is not a jackpot (A
If the result of step 3605 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either a "big hit" or a "miss", and there is no "small hit".

[Jackpot flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 14 is performed on the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the pending number 1), prepare it (A3702), and clear the special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the pending number 1) to 0. (A3703). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 2). Thereafter, a small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (A3704).

If the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. Overwrite and save (A3706), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit judgment process (A3704) is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the jackpot is determined as an option depending on whether the prepared jackpot random value matches the jackpot judgment value. You may execute jackpot determination processing to determine whether or not (A3707)
. If the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3707) is a jackpot (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. Save (A3709) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3707) is not a jackpot (A
If the result of step 3708 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends with the loss information being saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either a "small hit" or a "miss", but as an option, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a "big hit". It is also possible to provide a configuration in which

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the jackpot determination process (
A3604, A3707) will be explained in detail. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. In addition, the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure pending information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). Note that a jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, , it is determined that it is a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
2), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (A3804), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is “
Y"), and a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a jackpot is set as the judgment result (A3805). Once the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be explained. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit determination processing. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure pending information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the target (special figure 2) jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). Note that a small hit means that the jackpot random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a continuous number of values, and the jackpot random number is
A small hit is determined when the value is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit of the small hit determination value, and less than or equal to the small hit upper limit determination value, which is the upper limit of the small hit determination value.

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being both a small hit and a jackpot, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value. The value ranges (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) do not overlap. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided independently and the jackpot random number is used to determine the small win, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

If the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a loss as the judgment result (A3903),
The small hit determination process ends.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether the value is larger than that (A3902). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (result of A3902 is "Y"), set loss as the judgment result (A3903)
. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N''), and a small hit is set as the determination result (A3904). After setting the determination result, the small hit determination process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (=12.5%), but the small hit probability is set to other values. But that's fine.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). jackpot flag 1
If it is a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), a jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4003), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A40
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 5)
This is for setting the stop symbols in 1) and the stop symbols on the display device 41. Then, obtain the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, save it in the special symbol 1 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4007), obtain the fanfare information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, and save it in the RWM special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area. (A4008). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process. Subsequently, production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A to be described later) is saved (A4010). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4013.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4011
), the missed stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4012). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4013.

After steps A4010 and A4012, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command in the decorative special figure 1 command area as a production command (A4013). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 1 variable display game are set.

After that, the gaming control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4014). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4015), and clears the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (A4016). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 2 is a small win, that is, whether small win information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4101). jackpot flag 2
If it is a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4102). Next, the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol table is set (A4103), and the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins a V prize by opening the second special variable winning device 39 when a small hit occurs, and a jackpot occurs immediately after the small hit, so the special figure 2 variable display game does not win a small hit. (Even if the jackpot flag 2 indicates a small hit), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded. but,
A configuration is also possible in which a small winning symbol random number (A2911) is loaded and a stop symbol number corresponding to the small winning symbol random number is acquired. In this configuration, when winning a V prize (the result of A3003 in Figure 10 is "Y")
), load the jackpot symbol random number, obtain the stop symbol number, and step A4107
The processing from A4110 may be executed.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A41
05), acquire the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and save it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 5)
This is for setting the stop symbols in 2) and the stop symbols on the display device 41. Then, obtain the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, save it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4107), obtain the fanfare information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, and save it in the RWM special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. (A4108). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process. Next, production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbols BG to be described later) is saved (A4010). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4114.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot or not, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area. It is determined whether there is one (A4111). If the small hit flag 2 indicates a jackpot (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4102 and subsequent steps, but the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol table and the special pattern 2 jackpot stop pattern information table are different from those in the case of a small win. may be used.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4111 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
”), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4112), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4113). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4114.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process of step A4111 is an option and does not need to be executed. That is, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process may proceed to step A4112.

After steps A4110 and A4113, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command in the decorative special figure 2 command area as a production command (A4114). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 2 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4115). The decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4116), and clears the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (A4117). ). Moreover, when the small hit pattern random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small winning pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game execution means executes the special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, special figure information setting processing (A340
4, A3504) will be explained in detail. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without shortened time) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As for the performance mode, one performance mode is set from a plurality of performance modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol variation display game, etc. Incidentally, the fluctuations may be directly distributed based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol fluctuation display game, etc.

The gaming control device 100 first sets the first half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A
4201), obtain the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
202). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (A4203)
, obtain the offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1 or number of reserved special symbols 2) and the stopped symbol pattern (A4204).

Next, the gaming control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4206).
). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reservations, and the performance mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a variation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when there is a large number of reservations, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of a loss, so in cases other than a loss, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of first-half fluctuations. Note that a fluctuation group contains multiple fluctuation patterns, and when determining a fluctuation pattern, first select a fluctuation group, and then select one fluctuation pattern from this fluctuation group. ing.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A
4207), obtain the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
208). Next, set the second half variation group selection offset table (A4209)
, Obtain the offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special symbols and the stopped symbol pattern (A42
10).

Next, the gaming control device 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4212).
), the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reservations, and the production mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing second half variations (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variation group. However, only in the case of a loss, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds (when the number of holds is large, the reach occurrence rate becomes low). does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process (A
3406, A3506) will be explained in detail. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game until reaching the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The gaming control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A430
1) Obtain the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare it (A4302), and load fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for pending number 1). , prepare (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size for winning is 1 byte, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. The occurrence rate of hits is lower than the occurrence rate of misses, and 1 byte is sufficient, so from the viewpoint of saving data capacity, the size of hits is set to 1 byte. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of misses is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and because we want to create more diverse effects, the size of misses is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process moves to step A4307. In addition, if it is not an outlier (the result of A4304 is "N"), the distribution process (A4306) is performed and step A
The process moves to step 4307.

Next, the gaming control device 100 obtains the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (A4307), and prepares the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (pending Variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from (For number 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), and the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is obtained from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for pending number 1). 3 and prepare it (A4314). after that,
The distribution process (A4315) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. Through this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The gaming control device 100 first checks whether the data at the beginning of the selection table (second half variable group table prepared in A4302) is a code for no distribution (ie, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the second half fluctuation pattern is
In the latter half variation group table that defines only the second half variation selection table with "no reach" (for example, some variation group tables in case the result is a miss), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value is "0". , that is, a code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, if the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is a code with no distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is not a code for no distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half variation group table) Obtain the value (A4403).

Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404).
, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, if the new random value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address is updated to the next distribution value (A4406), and then the process moves to step A4403 to update it. Perform subsequent processing. That is, the next distribution value specified in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405 is obtained.
A new random number is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number that has already been determined (A44
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above process is performed in step A4405 where it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4
The process is executed until the result of step 405 is "Y". As a result, any one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the selection table (second-half variation group table). Then, in step A4405, if it is determined that the new random value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), and the 2-byte Finish the distribution process.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be explained in detail. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The distribution process includes selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or selecting the first half variation selection table (second half variation selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 3. This process is for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The gaming control device 100 first selects the data at the beginning of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). It is checked whether it is a code for no distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number). In the case of a selection table that stores a distribution value of , but does not require distribution, a distribution value of "0", that is, a code indicating no distribution, is defined at the beginning.

Then, if the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code for no distribution (result of A4502 is "Y"), The address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code for no distribution (result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
The first distribution value specified in the second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

Next, the gaming control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in step A4503 from the random value prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (the values of variable pattern random number 1, variable pattern random number 2, and variable pattern random number 3). to calculate a new random value (A45
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, if the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating the address to the next distribution value (A4506), the process moves to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the next distribution value specified in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomization value determined in the previous step A4505 is obtained. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505, the above process is performed so that the new random value is "0".
” (result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) specified in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, if the gaming control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates it to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be explained in detail. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (A4600a). If the variable display game to be started is the special figure 1 variable display game instead of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), clear the random number storage area of the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 ( A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is obtained (A4602).
4603). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (A4604), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6) Save the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607)
. After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A4608),
Prepare the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number as a production command (
A4609), performance command setting processing is performed (A4610). Next, update the number of reserved special symbols by -1 that corresponds to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag that indicates the fluctuation symbol to start (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2).
A4611), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

First, when the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot. It is determined whether or not (A4600b). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the variable display game to start is special figure 1.
Processing from step A4601 onwards is executed in the same way as in the case of a variable display game.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is neither a small hit nor a jackpot (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss result, Save the fluctuation time value (total fluctuation time value) corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the jackpot in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615)
.

Therefore, the variable time value of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or jackpot are time values that are set by allocation (lottery) and are not fixed. The variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in this case is a fixed time value that is set for each special figure 2 variable number of times after the end of the jackpot. That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled by the rotation speed. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a jackpot is also a fixed time value.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 issues a variable command (MODE, AC) corresponding to the variable time value.
TION) as a production command, and executes the processing from step A4610 onwards.

In addition, when the support status (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the mode (content) of general electricity support is variable as in the modification example described below, the fluctuation time value is the number of times the special figure 2 changes after the end of the jackpot. In addition to this, it may also be set corresponding to the support state.

Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variable display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination device that determines various random numbers stored in the startup storage device (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means that can determine a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in a variable display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special symbol variation display games. to set detailed performance contents in the decorative special figure variable display game. Information related to the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure reservation number command that includes information on the starting memory number (number of reservations), a decorative special figure command that includes information on stop symbols, and a change in the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information regarding patterns, and the commands are transmitted to the production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the production control device 300 can proceed efficiently.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure fluctuation processing (A2609) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation is in progress (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). When the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, when the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. (A4802).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is changing the special figure 2 (result of A4801 is "Y")
, Determine whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (A480
3). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbols (stop display) that are the results of the variable display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit or a jackpot, the game control device 100
In other words, in the case of a loss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot (
The display time corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or jackpot are not fixed based on the stop symbol pattern set in the lottery, while the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or jackpot is not fixed based on the stop symbol pattern set in the lottery. The display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in this case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variable number of times (the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of the jackpot. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a jackpot is also set fixedly.

In addition, as described below, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding the mode (content) of general power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 after the jackpot ends.
It may be set in accordance with not only the number of fluctuations but also the support state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). Thereafter, special figure display processing transition setting processing is executed (A4806). In the special figure display process transition setting process, set the process number "2" related to the special figure display process, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, and select the special figure 1
The stop flag related to the stoppage of variation on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the stoppage of variation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area.
After that, the special figure fluctuation processing is ended.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure display processing. FIG. 25A shows the first half of the special figure display process, and FIG. 25B shows the second half of the special figure display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not what has been executed this time is the variation of the special figure 1 (A5001). That is, it is determined whether the display of the stopped symbols (stopped display) is related to the special symbol 1 variable display game. If what was executed this time is the variation of special map 1 (the result of A5001 is "Y"), load the jackpot flag 1 (A5002), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5003), and load the loaded jackpot flag 1. determines whether it is a jackpot or not (A5
004).

When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, the gaming control device 100 sets the flag (A5004)
The result is "Y"), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (A5005), and the process moves to step A5006. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (result of A5004 is "N"), step directly.
The process moves to A5006.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (A5006
). In the special pattern normal process transition setting process 1, 0 is set as the process number related to the special pattern normal process, the process number is saved in the special pattern game process number area, and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 executes this time is the variation of special figure 2 (A500
1 result is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 is loaded (A5007), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5008). It is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5009). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (result of A5009 is “Y”),
Conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (A5010), and the process moves to step A5006. If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A5009 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a miss, step A5
The process moves to step 011.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processes of steps A5009 and A5010 are optional and do not need to be executed. That is, after step 5008, the process may proceed to step A5011.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the jackpot flag 2 indicates a small hit (A5
011). If the jackpot flag 2 indicates a small win (result of A5011 is "Y"), a small win fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5012), and production command setting processing is executed (A5013). Then, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded as a production command from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5014), and the production command setting process is executed (A5015). After that, execute the small winning pre-processing transition setting process (A5016)
, ends the special figure display process.

In the small hit pre-release process transition setting process, set 3 as the process number related to the small hit pre-release process, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, and set the small hit pre-release time (for example, 300 m
s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is a small hit, that is, when it is a loss (the result of A5011 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs a time reduction variation number update process (A5017) to update the time reduction variation number. is executed, and a performance mode information check process regarding the setting of the performance mode is executed (A5018). Then, the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation (number of remaining games for switching preparation) corresponding to the production mode number is set (A5019), and whether or not the remaining number of rotations for production (number of remaining production games) and the number of remaining rotations for switching preparation match. (A5020).

In addition, the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or it may be the same value in any of the production modes among the plurality of production modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all production modes among the plurality of production modes.

The game control device 100 determines that when the remaining number of rotations for production and the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation do not match (A
5020 result is "N"), the above-mentioned special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5023)
, ends the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the remaining number of rotations for production and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation match (result of A5020 is "Y"), game control device 100 prepares a production mode switching preparation command as a production command (A5021), After performing the command setting process (A5022), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5023), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode changes (several games before), and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in production across modes. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of time reductions (the initial value of the number of changes in time reduction described below) is less than a predetermined value (for example, 5), the performance mode (time reduction mode #1) corresponding to the time reduction state (general power support state) is selected. ) and the second starting memory (
In the performance mode (remaining hold consumption mode) corresponding to the special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 hold) being consumed (after the time-saving state), the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation is set to 0, and the pre-reading effect can be performed to the maximum. .

[Time reduction variation number update process]
Next, details of the time reduction variation number update process (A5017) in the special figure display process will be explained. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts by 1) (A52).
01), it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become 0 (A5202). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5202 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction state (general power support state) continues in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the time reduction fluctuation number update process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5202 is "Y"), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the current special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 uses the probability information command ( Time saving end) is prepared as a production command (A5203), and production command setting processing is executed (A5204). Then, the signal related to the time-saving termination is saved in the external information output data area (A5205), and the signal related to the time-saving termination is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without time saving in the game status display number area (A
5207), the low probability flag is saved in the general game mode flag area (A5208).
Then, save the probability information command (normal) in the transmission command area when power is restored (A52
09), the time reduction variation number update process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time saving state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern winning probability) is high (normal pattern high probability), and in other than the time saving state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is high (normal pattern high probability). The probability of winning in the figure fluctuation display game (normal figure probability, normal figure winning probability) is low (normal figure low probability).

In addition, the time reduction variation number update process is performed when the special figure 2 variation display game is a failure (A501
1 result is "N"), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 only in the special figure 2 variation display game. For this reason, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is that the number of changes in the special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined value (the number of time saving times, the initial value of the number of time saving changes). However, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss, by updating the time reduction variation number by -1, the time reduction end condition can be changed to the total number of variations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot (special figure 1 The total number of executions of the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) may reach a predetermined value. Alternatively, the time-saving end condition may be that the number of fluctuations in special chart 2 after the end of the jackpot reaches the first predetermined number (for example, 5 times), or the total number of fluctuations in special chart 1 and special chart 2 after the end of the jackpot. The second predetermined number of times (for example, twice the first predetermined value = 10 times) may be satisfied.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the performance mode information check process (A5018) in the special figure display process will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of production mode information check processing. Note that the performance mode information check process is executed when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a loss.

The gaming control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5401). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5401 is "Y"), the production mode information check process is ended. In this case, the production mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, a production mode that continues until the next jackpot is selected.

In addition, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (A54), the gaming control device 100
If the result of 01 is "N"), the number of remaining rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (A5402), and the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0. (A5403). Here, the number of remaining rotations of the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variable display game (in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game) is executed this time.
Even in the case of a non-main variable display game (here, the special figure 1 variable display game), it is also possible to have a configuration in which -1 is updated.

Depending on the gaming state and the like, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main fluctuating display game (main fluctuating display game) is the one that is executed more frequently between the special figure 1 fluctuating display game and the special diagram 2 fluctuating display game, and the non-main fluctuating display game (secondary fluctuating display game) Game) is special map 1
This is the one that is not frequently executed between the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the production control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating the main variable display game according to the game state etc.

If the number of rotations remaining for the performance is not 0 (the result of A5403 is "N"), the process moves to step A5413. In addition, if the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, if you want to change the effect mode from the next special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect mode information address table (A5404). , obtains the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5405).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred, and RW
Save in the production mode number area in M (A5406), obtain the remaining production rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be transferred, and save in the production remaining rotation number area in RWM (A5407)
, acquires the next mode transition information of the production mode to be transitioned to, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5408).

In addition, when changing the production mode due to the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number = 0), the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to is set to the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 9).
You can set it to . The number of remaining reservations is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are consumed after the end of the time saving state, and is the number of times the special symbol 2 changes after the end of the time saving state. The remaining reserve is generated by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, which is released by winning a common symbol during the time saving state. In this way, the remaining hold extinguishment mode (FIG. 54) can be set as a corresponding production mode while the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) is being used up.

Alternatively, if the production mode is to be shifted when the normal variable winning device 37 is released by winning a normal figure during the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half release described later), the production remaining of the production mode to be shifted to is completed. The number of rotations (initial value) may be set to the number of reserved special figures 2 at that time. As a result, the after-opening mode (FIG. 54A) is set as the production mode corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is released by winning a general drawing during the time-saving state, is completed. Can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the remaining number of production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to which the transition is made upon the end of the time saving state (number of time reduction fluctuations = 0) is set to a predetermined value corresponding to the number of time reductions (for example, a value obtained by subtracting the number of time reductions from 6). ) to set the normal power release before end mode (FIG. 54A).

Furthermore, when switching the production mode due to the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number = 0), the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to is set to the number of reserved special figures 2 or special figure 2 at that time. It may be set to a predetermined number that is less than or equal to the number of reservations. In this way, the production mode that corresponds to the number of reserved special figures 2 at the end of time saving or the predetermined number of remaining reserves (special figure 2 pending, special figure 2 starting memory) is the mode for extinguishing the remaining reserves generated during time saving (figure 2). 54B) can be set. The number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode that changes after the remaining suspension consumption mode that occurs during time reduction is set to the specified remaining number of rotations (for example, 1
0) minus the number of remaining holds that are consumed in the remaining hold consumption mode during time reduction (excess hold count)
Can be set to In this way, the excess reservation consumption mode (FIG. 54B) can be set as the performance mode after the remaining reservation consumption mode during time reduction.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including probability state information, time saving information, and performance mode information) corresponding to the newly set performance mode number as a performance command (A5409). , it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field at power outage recovery (A5410). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field at power outage recovery (result of A5410 is "Y"), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the process moves to step A5412.

In addition, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5410 result is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5411 ), executes a production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command (A5412).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation number as an effect command (A5413), and executes an effect command setting process (A5414).
). Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the number of rotations remaining for the production. Next, prepare a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number as a production command (A541
5) Execute production command setting processing (A5416). As a result, the production control device 30
0 means that the number of time reduction fluctuations can be obtained.

Next, when the new performance mode number is acquired in step A5406, the game control device 100 determines whether the new performance mode is a left-handed batting mode (A5417).
, if it is not the left-handed hitting mode (the result of A5417 is "N"), the production mode information check process is ended. Also, if the mode is for left-handed hitting (result of A5417 is "Y")
In this case, a left-handed hitting instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A5418), a production command setting process is executed (A5419), and the production mode information check process is ended.

In addition, the production mode information check process is performed when the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A50
11 is executed only when the result is "N"), the number of remaining rotations of the effect is updated by -1 only in the special figure 2 variable display game (A5402). Thereby, the production mode can be updated only in accordance with the number of variations in the special figure 2. However, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure, the remaining number of rotations of the effect will be reduced by -1
May be updated. In this way, the production mode can be updated according to the total number of variations of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 (the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game).

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (A1312b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of accessory game processing. In the accessory game processing, the entire processing related to the jackpot state is controlled.

The gaming control device 100 first executes the lower prize opening switch monitoring process (A5601)
. In the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the accessory game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A5602). By updating the accessory game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted for the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the accessory game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the accessory game processing is ended.

If the accessory game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is “
Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the accessory game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the accessory game processing number is set in the register (A5604). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the accessory game process number is obtained using the accessory game sequence branch table (A5605).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the accessory game processing number, and a game branching process corresponding to the accessory game processing number is executed (A5606).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
Accessory item normal processing is executed to perform settings for starting a jackpot, etc. (A5607). For example, in the accessory game normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" related to the fanfare mid-processing is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area. Note that details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

If the game processing number is “1” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
Processing during fanfare is executed (A5608). For example, during fanfare processing,
A process number "2" related to the process during the interval is set and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
Processing during the interval is executed (A5609). For example, in interval processing, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the lower prize opening opening time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the lower prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is executed. Set as a performance command, set the process number "3" related to the jackpot opening process, and save it in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the process sets the ending command, and the jackpot opening processing that sets the information necessary to process the remaining balls in the jackpot hole. (A5610). For example, in the jackpot opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, and a process number "4" related to the jackpot remaining ball process is set and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, execute the jackpot remaining ball processing that sets the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, and the process number "2" related to the process during the interval is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, and a process number "5" related to the jackpot end process is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “5” in step A5606, the gaming control device 100
Execute the jackpot end process that sets the information necessary to execute the accessory normal process (A
5612). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the time reduction judgment data that includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), necessary information such as the general electricity support state (hour reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state is determined. Set the information and enter the processing number "0" for normal processing of accessories.
Set and save in the accessory game processing number area.

[Usual processing of accessories]
Next, details of the accessory normal processing (A5607) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be explained. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the condition device is in operation (A5801
). If the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, there is jackpot information in jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or there is a winning in the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (input to specific area switch 72, V winning) In this case, it can be determined that the conditioner is in operation. If the conditional device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the accessory normal processing ends.

The game control device 100, when the condition device is in operation (the result of A5801 is “Y”)
, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round number upper limit value area (A5802). Next, save the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), prepare the probability information command (normal) as a production command (A5804), and perform production command setting processing. Execute(
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a production command (A5806), and executes production command setting processing (A58).
07). Then, load the decorative special pattern command (decoration special pattern 1 command or decoration special pattern 2 command) from the decorative special pattern command area of the special pattern that has become a jackpot or small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and perform the production. Command setting processing is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). . Then, save the initial value in the round number area (A
5812). The initial value is 0 when the condition device is in operation due to the jackpot information, and is 1 when the condition device is in operation due to winning in the specific area 86 (V win).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare mid-process transition setting process (A581
3) End the normal processing of accessories. For example, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number related to the fanfare mid-process, the process number is saved in the accessory game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area. , clear the time reduction variation number area.

[Jackpot end process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (A5612) in the above-mentioned accessory game process will be explained. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot termination processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time reduction (A6001). The data with time reduction indicates that the time reduction state (general power support state) will be entered after the end of the jackpot state. Data indicating no time saving indicates that the time saving state (general power support state) does not occur after the end of the jackpot state.

When the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction, the gaming control device 100 executes the jackpot end setting process 1 in order to transition to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends (A6002), and when the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction. In the case of data, after the jackpot ends, jackpot end setting processing 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state (general power support state) (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the performance mode information address table (A6004), and uses the performance mode transition information (A4010,
The address of the table corresponding to A4110) is obtained (A6005), and the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode set after the end of the jackpot state is obtained and saved (A6006). This allows you to select the production mode to which you want to transition after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the performance (initial value) of the performance mode that is set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of rotations remaining for production (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations), or the total number of times of time reduction and the prescribed number of remaining reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the jackpot ends, the same performance mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special symbol 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on transition to the next mode of the production mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag and the newly set production mode number as a production command (A6009), and save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A6010). ), executes a production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electricity support), and production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a production rotation number command corresponding to the production remaining rotation number as a production command (A6012), and executes production command setting processing (A6013).
Then, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number (in this case, the initial value of the time reduction number) is prepared as a production command (A6014), and production command setting processing is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the production mode transition information area (A6016),
The accessory normal process transition setting process is executed (A6017), and the jackpot end process is ended. In the role item normal processing transition setting process, in order to transition to the role item normal processing, the processing number related to the role object normal processing is set to "0", the process number is saved in the role object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202), and saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). 2. The normal number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area as display data of the gaming state display section 58 (lamp D17) (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the regular pattern game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the special pattern time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (A6).
205). Then, the time reduction variation number area is cleared (A6206), and the batch display device 50
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 1 area as display data of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be explained. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). Then, the signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6403).
A6404).

Next, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 58 (lamp D) of the collective display device 50.
17) Save the number during time saving in the game status display number 2 area as display data (A640
5) Save the high probability flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (A6406), and save the special pattern shortened medium flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has become a jackpot after the time saving has ended, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation has become a jackpot (
A6408). When the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a jackpot or when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), a stop symbol pattern ( Alternatively, the initial value of the time reduction variation number (time reduction number) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the symbols A to F described later is saved (A6409), and the processing from step A6411 is executed.

The game control device 100 determines that when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot after the time saving ends, that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation becomes a jackpot (the result of A6408 is "
Y''), and saves the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of time reductions, here 99) in the time reduction fluctuation number area (A6410).

After that, the game control device 100 selects a stop symbol pattern (or a stop symbol number, a symbol A to be described later).
-G), the type of support state (support mode, general power release pattern), which is the state (aspect) of general power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411). Note that step A6411
This process is optional, and is executed when the support state regarding the aspect (content) of general electricity support is variable, as in a modification example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the first game state display section 57 (lamp D) of the collective display device 50.
7) Save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 1 area as the display data (A6
412), prepares a right hit instruction notification command as a production command (A6413), executes production command setting processing (A6414), and ends jackpot end setting processing 2.

[Puzu game processing]
Next, details of the common map game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fuzuzu game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the entire process related to the general figure fluctuation display game is controlled;
Configure the display of general maps, etc.

The gaming control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing to monitor the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes the general power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). Details of the general electricity prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the general game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A7603). Note that the minimum value of the general figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the regular game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

If the value of the general game processing timer is 0 (result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the standard game processing number to A general game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to a corresponding process is set in a register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general game process number based on the set standard game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the general game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the general game process number is executed (A7607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the gaming control device 100
It monitors the start of the fluctuation of the general pattern fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the general pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary to perform the processing during the general pattern fluctuation display game. Execute (A7608). The details of the ordinary drawing processing will be described later.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the process during normal pattern fluctuation for setting information necessary for performing the process during normal pattern display ( A7609). For example, in the process during general figure fluctuation, in order to move to the process during general figure display, in addition to setting "2" as the game process number and saving in the general figure game process number area, the general figure display time is Save in processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the general map fluctuation display game is a win, the game control device 100 sets the general power opening time, and performs processing during the general map winning. A general map display process is executed to set information necessary for performing the following (A7610). For example, in the general pattern display process, if the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win, in order to move to the general pattern winning process, set "3" as the game processing number and enter the general pattern game processing number area. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the regular game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the regular game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the gaming control device 100 performs a general operation such as setting information necessary to continue the process during the normal game or to perform the process of remaining normal electricity balls. The drawing processing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal game winning process, after setting is made to open the normal variable prize winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, in order to move to the general ball remaining ball process, "4" is set as the game processing number. Save in the Fuzu game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general power remaining ball process to set the information necessary to perform the general map per end process (A7612 ). For example, in the process of remaining spheres on a general map, in order to move to the end process for a general map, in addition to setting "5" as the game processing number and saving it in the general game processing number area, the general game ending time is Save in processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern per end process that sets information necessary for performing the normal pattern normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the common pattern winning end process, in order to proceed to the normal pattern processing, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 53 (A7614). Thereafter, a symbol fluctuation control process for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the general game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
If the result is "N"), that is, the time has not expired, the processes from step A7614 onwards are executed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the common map game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y''), it is determined whether the player is in a right-handed gaming state (A7702). The gaming states for hitting right are a jackpot state and a time saving state (general power support state). If the game state is to play right-handed (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process moves to step A7705. If the game state is not to play right-handed (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed hitting instruction notification command (left-handed hitting instruction command) is prepared as a production command (A7703), and production command setting processing is executed (A7704). The production control device 300 that has received the left-handed hitting instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing the left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by displaying a left-handed hitting instruction.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the number of regular symbols on hold and determines whether the number of regular symbols on hold is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). If the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit (result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the symbol variation display game is being fluctuated (in execution) or in the state where the symbol is hit. It is determined whether or not (A7706). When the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not in the normal pattern winning state (result of A7706 is "N")
, the number of reserved maps is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the number of reserved symbols is updated by +1 only when the general pattern fluctuation display game is not changing or in the state of hitting a common pattern. is not substantially accumulated and momentarily becomes 1 just before the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (the number of normal patterns held is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved symbols (A7708). Then, a winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), a winning pattern random number is extracted and saved in the winning pattern random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), and when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), Or, if the normal pattern fluctuation display game is changing or in the normal pattern winning state (A7
If the result of step 706 is "Y"), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public power switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the general drawing game process will be explained. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general electricity winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in a winning state and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is performing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. (A7801). And, if the normal map is in progress (the result of A7801 is "Y")
, it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general power counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines that the count number of the updated general electricity counter is the upper limit (for example,
10) is reached (A7804). Then, when the count reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal pattern per end pointer area in the RWM, and the normal pattern in the RWM is loaded. It is saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (A7805).

Finally, the general computer game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the general computer winning switch monitoring process is ended. That is, if there is a general winning amount equal to or greater than the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal drawing processing control pointer area at that point, and the normal variable winning device 37 closes. The winning state of the common map ends midway.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting a normal pattern (the result of A7801 is "N"), or when it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"). ), or if it is determined that the count has not reached the upper limit (A780
If the result of step 4 is "N"), the general electricity prize switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usual processing of ordinary drawings]
Next, details of the normal pattern processing (A7608) in the general pattern game processing will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary pattern processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved symbols is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the winning random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area per common symbol (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area per common symbol. (
After loading the winning symbol random number from the reserved number 1), clear the random number storage area per common symbol (for the reserved number 1) and the random number storage area per common symbol (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A7902) . Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a winning result in the general map fluctuation display game is in the high probability state (in a high probability state) where the probability of a winning result is higher than usual, that is, whether it is in a time saving state (general support state). (A7903). In addition, in this embodiment, the range of the winning random number is 0 to 250, the probability of winning a normal figure in high probability is 251/251, and the probability of hitting a common figure in low probability is 0/251.
It is. It should be noted that the probability of winning a normal figure in low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) without being limited to this.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal pattern (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal pattern (A7904).
), if the probability is medium to high for normal figures (the result of A7903 is "Y"), a high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0), which is the lower limit judgment value for medium to high probability, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Shift to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). In addition, the upper limit judgment value here is common to the average pattern with high probability and the average pattern with low probability. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If it is a failure, the process moves to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (if the result of A7907 is “
Y"), that is, in the case of a loss, save the loss information in the hit flag area (A7908)
. Further, the winning stop symbol number is set as the regular symbol stopping symbol number (A7909), the losing symbol information is saved in the regular symbol stopping symbol information area (A7910), and the process moves to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (if the result of A7907 is “
In other words, in the case of a hit, save the winning information in the hit flag area (A7911), set the winning stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded winning symbol random number (A7912), and set the winning symbol number corresponding to the winning stop symbol number. The stopped symbol information is saved in the regular symbol stopped symbol information area (A7913), and the process moves to step A7914. Here, there is only one type of winning stop symbol (ordinary symbol per symbol), but there may be several kinds in a modification described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A791
4) Save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per common symbol (A7916), and clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917).
), the number of reserved maps is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the general pattern variation display game regarding the oldest standard pattern reservation number 1, the rankings of the standard pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are pending after the standard pattern reservation number 1 are moved up one by one.
Through this process, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figures 1 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared to 0, and the number of reserved ordinary figures is decremented by 1 to become zero.

After that, the gaming control device 100 loads information on the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the process of step A7919 is an option, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (aspect) of general electricity support, is variable as in a modified example described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A7920). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern), which is the state (aspect) of general power support, is variable as in the modification example described later, the variable general power supply fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set. and save it in the general game processing timer area. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (A7921), and the normal pattern normal process is ended. In addition, the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, if the number of reserved symbols is 0, the gaming control device 100 determines that the result of A7901 is “
Y"), set "0" as the processing number to transition to normal processing (A7922),
Save the process number in the general game process number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the unauthorized monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the regular processing for regular electricity is terminated.

[General map fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process. The ordinary figure fluctuation process transition setting process is executed in step A7921 in the ordinary figure normal process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation processing.
(A8101) and save the process number in the Fuzu game process number area (A8102)
).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1
Save the fluctuating signal (on) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and save the fluctuating flag indicating that the general pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating in the general pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8103).
A8104). Then, the initial value of the blinking control timer, which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking cycle of the common figure display, is saved in the common figure blinking control timer area (A8105), and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the common figure fluctuation symbol number area. Save (A8106). Thereafter, the general figure fluctuation process transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, details of the process during normal pattern fluctuation (A7609) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the normal game display process (A8301), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern variable display game on the normal pattern display device, in the general pattern game processing timer area ( A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the normal symbol (turns off the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, save the stop flag indicating that the general pattern fluctuation display game is stopped in the general pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8
305), the process during normal pattern fluctuation is ended.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (A7610) in the general map game process will be explained. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal figure display process.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A84).
02). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A8403).

If the winning information is set in the winning flag, the gaming control device 100 (A8403)
The result is "Y"), set the processing setting table during winning (A8404), obtain the winning start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and save it in the control pointer area during normal pattern winning. (A8405). In addition, the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal pattern winning ending pointer area (A8406). Next, the general power open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general figure game processing timer area (A8407). With the above processing, the normal variable prize winning device 3 in the time saving state
Seven opening modes are set, for example, two openings are possible. In addition, the winning common figure stop pattern (
There is only one type of symbol per general map, and the hit start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and general power release time are fixed, but the support state (support mode, If the normal power release pattern) is variable, the hit start pointer value corresponding to the support state,
The winning end pointer value and general power release time may be set and saved in the general figure game processing timer area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern per process.
” (A8408) and save the process number in the Fuzu game process number area (A840)
9). After that, the signal regarding the winning of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (turn on the signal during normal pattern 1 hit)
Then, a signal related to the start of normal electric power operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid, ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8411).
.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and records the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal voltage fraud monitoring period. The information in the memorized area of the number of fraudulent winnings of the public power network is cleared (A8413). Finally, a flag specifying the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the regular electricity fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

If the winning information is not set in the winning flag, the gaming control device 100 (A840)
The result of step 3 is "N"), and "0" is set as the processing number to move to normal processing (A
8415), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (A8416). after that,
A flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the unauthorized monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during public electricity display is ended.

[Medium processing per ordinary map]
Next, details of the normal pattern winning process (A7611) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the process during normal drawing.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern (A860).
1) Determine whether or not the value of the loaded control pointer for a normal figure has reached the upper limit value of the control pointer for a normal figure (win end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, the game control device 100 determines that if the value of the control pointer during a normal pattern does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (hit end pointer value) per normal pattern (the result of A8602 is "N") , updates the medium control pointer by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during normal drawing is ended. Note that details of the normal power operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during a normal pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (hit end pointer value) per normal pattern (the result of A8602 is "Y")
, without executing the process of updating (+1) the processing control pointer area during normal drawing in step A8603, executes the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604), and ends the processing during normal drawing.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the general power operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal map per process will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched depending on the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process depending on the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal pattern) (A8701). Note that here, the control pointer is set to step A8603.
Use the value before updating. Examples of control pointers are shown in FIGS. 56, 72, and 73, which will be described later. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process moves to step A8702 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so the weight after the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is time (general power interval time, e.g. 60000 msec
) is saved in the Fuzu game processing timer area (A8702). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding general power support is variable as in the modification example described below,
A wait time (normal power interval time) may be set depending on the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general power operation transition setting process.

In addition, if the value of the control pointer is an odd value, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so the normal variable winning device 100 corresponding to the control pointer The general power open time, which is the open time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general power game processing timer area (A8704). The normal power release time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Further, in order to turn on the general power solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general power solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general power operation transition setting process is ended.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the hit end pointer value, the gaming control device 10
0 sets "4" as the processing number (A8706) in order to proceed to step A8706, end the open control of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and execute the general power remaining ball processing (A7612).
), the process number is saved in the general game process number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the general ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the general game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to set the general electric solenoid 37c to OFF, save the off data in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8709
), the normal power operation transition setting process ends. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding general power support is variable like the modification mentioned later, the general power remaining bulb processing time may be set corresponding to the support state.

[Permanent electricity remaining bulb processing]
Next, the details of the remaining sphere processing (A7612) in the general figure game process will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for processing remaining power bulbs.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number “5” related to the normal pattern per end process (A8
901), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (A8902). Thereafter, the game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding general power support is variable like the modification mentioned later, the general power map ending time may be set corresponding to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Next, clear the normal power count area that counts the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A
8905), and further clears the control pointer area during normal drawing (A8906). Thereafter, the end pointer area per ordinary figure is cleared (A8907), and the ordinary figure remaining ball processing is ended.

[Full drawing termination process]
Next, details of the end process (A7613) per common figure in the common figure game process will be explained. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal drawing termination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number “0” related to the normal pattern processing (A910
1) Furthermore, the process number is saved in the general game process number area (A9102). After that, a signal related to the end of winning of the normal symbol fluctuation game (turn off the signal during one normal symbol winning) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 saves a flag (fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the power grid fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104),
Thereafter, the normal pattern winning ending process is ended.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (processing) that the production control device 300 executes using the production control program will be described.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the production control device 300 will be explained. Figure 44
is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the production control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the production control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B*****".

When execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruptions (
B0001). Next, execute the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B
0003), and enable interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the gaming control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 becomes executable.

Next, the production control device 300 allows generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is started with the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
monitor whether it is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period (for example, every two hours), and there is no need to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. It may be configured such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the production control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). ). The production control device 300 sets a timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when reading time information from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle or when power is turned on.
When reading the time information from the C338, the timer (clocking means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC338. The production control device 300 may execute various processes using a timer. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 detects an operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (a signal from the performance button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), and changes the performance content (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
Hall/player setting mode processing is executed to accept operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor), the players, etc. (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (B0012). In the performance point control process, performance points are added when a performance or operation for which performance points are added is executed, and at the end of a game, etc., so that performance points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on performance points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the production control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as production random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the gaming control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Note that details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process for editing and controlling the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for a customer. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer, etc. The effect display editing process is executed (B0017). If the drawing data set at this time allows the VDP 312 to complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec), the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problem. Then, preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation completion setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines whether it is frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the process to the display device 41 is repeated. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, if periodic V blanking (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period), frames are switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, but the interval may be further increased.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process that controls decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process that controls a performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect that drives a motor is set.

Then, after completing the process of B0023 described above, the production control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of commands received in order to check the number of commands received from the gaming control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of commands received is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is being received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the production control device 300 registers the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103
), copies the contents of the receive command buffer in RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds by 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer stores 32 received commands.
It is structured so that you can save up to 100 pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"). ”), the processes from steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the production control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands.

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines that when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”).
''), loads the received command content in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing to analyze the content (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step The processes from B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 shows the production control device 30
2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by the computer.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The commands sent from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 include the MODE section (MODE command) and the A
The command consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted successively from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether the MODE section indicating the type of command has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific production instructions, etc.) has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
The result is "Y"), and it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in processing from B1205 onwards.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variable command (B1205). Incidentally, the variable command is a command that instructs a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and includes, for example, a variable command. If the MODE part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), variable command processing is executed (B1206
), the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command, the production control device 300 (B12
05 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit type command (B
1207). In addition, winning commands are commands that command operations related to production during jackpots and small wins (such as displaying fanfare screens and round screens).For example, the fanfare command to command the fanfare screen, the round screen display command, etc. These include a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, and an ending command for commanding an ending screen. If the MODE section represents a winning command (result of B1207 is "Y"), winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command, the production control device 300 (B12
07 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol-related command (B
1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include, for example, a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-related command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-related command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE section represents a single-shot command (result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command, the production control device 300 executes (B12
11 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The prefetch symbol type command includes, for example, a prefetch stop symbol command. If the MODE part represents a prefetch symbol type command (the result of B1213 is “Y
”), executes prefetch symbol-related command processing (B1214), and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a prefetch symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). The lookahead variation command includes, for example, a lookahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a prefetch variable command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process ends.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the AC to the MODE part is
Even if the combination of TION parts is not correct (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing is executed to set the type of gaming machine (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specification command, the production control device 300 (B1
301 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command, then (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization, etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B13
05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a power failure recovery command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B13
07 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
313 is "Y"), probability information setting processing is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
313 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents an error/invalid command (B1315). In addition, examples of error/illegal commands include the unauthorized occurrence command, unauthorized release command, status off command, status on command, magnet unauthorized notification command (magnetic error command), and panel radio unauthorized notification command (panel radio error command). be.
The fraud occurrence command includes a command indicating the occurrence of a fraudulent prize based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The unauthorized release command is a command that indicates unauthorized release. In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1310), the occurrence of fraudulent winnings and the cancellation of fraudulent winnings are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraudulent cancellation command can be transmitted. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error), or a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (
There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal (body frame open error, front frame open error) from the body frame open detection switch). Further, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred. A state on command and a state off command can be transmitted in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1310). When there is a detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315). When there is a detection (radio wave fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio wave fraud notification command is transmitted in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

If the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel notification of error or fraud (
B1316), the one-shot command processing ends. In the error/fraud setting process, settings are made to generate an error or fraud notification sound.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the production control device 300 then outputs a command for switching the production mode (special figure display processing). (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for switching the production mode (result of B1317 is "Y"), production mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the production mode (result of B1317 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section indicates an out pitch number command indicating the number of out pitches. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE part represents the out pitch count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out pitch count reception process is executed (B1
320), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent the number of out pitches command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a count command (big winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE section represents a command for counting the big prize opening switch (result of B1321 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command, the production control device 300 (B
1321), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. When the MODE part represents a setting value information command, (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1323), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, the command (A
1030). If the MODE part represents a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting process, the content of the setting change command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting changing indication is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the production control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, the command while confirming probability settings (
A1033). If the MODE part represents a setting confirmation command (B1
327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command to confirm probability settings is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that settings are being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the pattern stop command includes, for example, a pattern stop command for special pattern 1 (decoration special pattern 1 stop command) and a pattern stop command for special pattern 2 (decoration special pattern 2 stop command). And MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the symbol (result of B1329 is "Y"), the production control device 3
00 then determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, the performance control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the gaming status flag is set to the normal status, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the gaming status flag may be set to ``Fluctuating'', ``Making a jackpot'', or ``Making a small hit''. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
), or the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N")
, the production control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the production control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG. 47 in single-shot command processing. For example, the performance control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, a performance rotation number command, a hitting method instruction notification command (a left-handed hitting instruction notification command, a right-handed hitting instruction notification command), etc. from the gaming control device 100, and receives the commands. You may perform the corresponding processing. The production control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time reduction state from the time reduction variation number command (time reduction variation number), can obtain the remaining number of production rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command, and can obtain the remaining number of production rotations in the time reduction state from the production rotation number command. You can set the performance based on the number of fluctuations in the number of changes and the number of rotations remaining for each performance mode. The performance control device 300 displays a hitting method instruction display (left-handed hitting instruction display or right-handed hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to play in response to a hitting method instruction notification command (left-handed hitting instruction notification command or right-handed hitting instruction notification command). ) to display device 4
1 etc. can be displayed (notified).

[Ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the prefetch symbol-related command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 shows the production control device 30
It is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch symbol type command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information on special figure 1 pending (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, if the latest received decoration special figure pending number command is the number of decorative special figure 1 pending. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 pending (result of B1601 is "Y"), send the pre-read symbol type command (pre-read stop symbol command) to the special figure 1 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 1. Save (B1602).

If the latest reservation information is not the information of special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is "N"), the production control device 300, in other words, the latest received decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special pattern 2 pre-read pattern command area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the production control device 300 sets a prefetch variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch variable command (B160
4). This is because the pre-read symbol type command and the pre-read variable type command are set, so the pre-read variable type command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-read symbol type command. Thereafter, the prefetch symbol-related command processing ends.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the prefetch variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 49 shows the production control device 30
3 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of prefetch variable command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first issues a prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command).
It is determined whether or not it is waiting for reception of (B1701). If the above-mentioned read-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the read-ahead variable command processing is ended. If the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub board) displays the latest pending information pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
A look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations is set (B1703), and a sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section is obtained corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a look-ahead variation command ACT in the sub that corresponds to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command is set.
(B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the intra-sub look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. Note that if it is a normal (valid) command, it will be converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), MODE part and A after conversion
The converted command configured from the CT section is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, execute read-ahead command consistency check processing (B170
9), Determine whether the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is normal (B1710
).

Note that the first half fluctuation time corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of suspensions when the suspension variable display game is started. When the pending variable display game starts, if there are no other pending events, the first half of the variation will be longer, and if a new pending event occurs and the number of pending events is large, the first half of the variation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation command is converted into the sub-prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal commands of the production control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half fluctuation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same strain,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the production control device 30
If 0 is used as is, there will be too many numbers and it will be difficult to check. For example, in normal reach,
There are different types, such as normal reach - 1 stop off and normal reach + 1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portions indicating reach of the same system into the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portions, the number is reduced and the burden of check processing such as prefetch command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the intra-sub intra-prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , If the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the command after conversion, and the prefetch variable command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B
1710 is "Y"), the pending information to be read ahead (information on the latest pending) is loaded from the read ahead variation command area (B1711), and the read ahead lottery process regarding the look ahead performance of the latest pending is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead performance include a continuous preview performance (including a chance look-ahead performance), a look-ahead zone performance, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect of the latest suspension (a suspension change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the prefetched performance (pending change notice, etc.) that occurs is a performance that will start immediately (B1715). If the prefetch effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). If the prefetch effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715
(the result is "N"), a display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of a hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the hold number decreases) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the prefetch variable command processing ends.

On the other hand, if the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the effect control device 300 immediately ends the prefetch variable command process.

[Design-related command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the symbol-related command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-related command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 executes the received design-related command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of parts) and save it in a specified area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between special symbols 1 and 2, symbol types are set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol types correspond to the losing symbol, the jackpot symbol A of special symbol 1, the jackpot symbol BF of special symbol 2, and the jackpot symbol G of remaining reservation (special symbol 2 reservation).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines the special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Or, it is determined whether the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is ended. If the special symbol type is not determined (B1901 result is "N"), check the combination of the received variable type command and symbol type command (B1902), and check whether the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent. is determined (B1903). Here, inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performance, such as when a symbol-related command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable-related command of a loss is received. When the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903 result is "Y")
, ends variable command processing.

If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1
904), execute a variable effect setting process to set a variable effect that is a variable effect (B19)
05). Note that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to special figure changing (B1906), and if the number of look-ahead performances such as continuous performances is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable command process (FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation (a variation that does not result in a ready-to-reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type. Obtain the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuations, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a variation with reach, the production control device 300 controls the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) (B2004), and set the M of the variable command (variable command).
The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the production control device 300 performs a lottery for previews that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, set the second half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2007), and execute the variable command ACT. The address of the second-half preview distribution group table corresponding to the division is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for previews appearing during the second-half fluctuation (reach) is performed (B2009). Thereafter, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (preview performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the preview (B2011). Thereafter, the stop symbols of the decorative special symbol variable display game are determined in accordance with the contents of variable effects such as reach effects and preview effects (B2012). Here, the decorative stop symbols are specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of a missed symbol.

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display settings for a variable performance (B2013), and performs display settings for a preview performance (B2014). Subsequently, a display setting for a reduction in reservation corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, a display in which the reservation display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is decreased (display of reservation shift) is set (B2015). Next, an audio number that determines the presentation mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's voice and a decoration number that determines the presentation mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016
). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) includes a plurality of decorative light emitting parts (decoration LED
etc.), and emits light in a light emission manner (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based not only on the content of the performance but also on setting information (setting values). In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting section (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display settings for decorative special figure fluctuations corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), display settings are made for a fourth symbol variation regarding a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41 (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display section 1 of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received winning command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the winning command represents fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a jackpot fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process is performed to set the fanfare effect. (B2102). In addition, in response to the jackpot fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, a hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction) may be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information about the upper limit of the number of rounds for this jackpot. Subsequently, the game status flag indicating the current gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the winning command processing is ended. The upper limit for the number of rounds is
It can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol type command (decoration special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the winning command is a round command or a small winning opening command, the production control device 300 executes the round production setting process, and the current The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "Round in progress" (B2105, B21
06), the hit-related command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
(the result is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the production control device 300 executes the interval production setting process, and sets the game that indicates the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state). The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (B2107
The result is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
10 result is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the production control device 300 executes the ending production setting process for setting the ending production, and changes the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag indicating (P machine state) is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the winning command processing is ended.

In addition, if the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2
110 is "N"), the production control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the first embodiment. The gaming state transitions (transfers) by the gaming control of the gaming control device 100. In particular, the gaming states are shown to change when a jackpot occurs, and after a predetermined number of games (number of rotations, number of changes) pass. In FIG. 54A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special pattern probability), the state of the normal pattern winning probability (normal pattern probability) which is the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the production mode, the main pattern, Features such as a variation display game (main variation display game, main variation), right-handed or left-handed firing mode, etc. are shown.

The performance mode (performance stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end process (FIG. 30) or the performance mode information check process (FIG. 27), as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control device 300 can also set based on the number of time reductions, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific gaming state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific gaming state to be a probability variable state where the jackpot probability is high.

In addition, in the transition state, the jackpot probability and normal pattern probability are the same as in the normal gaming state, so
Probably, the transition state may be included in the normal game state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed when the remaining reservation is used up, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and the small hit and the V passing during the small hit (to the V prize opening) A jackpot due to the passing of a game ball, winning a prize (V) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a gaming state that can be distinguished from the normal gaming state. Further, the transition state and the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be combined into an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. It may also be a state.

First, each gaming state will be explained. In the normal gaming state, the gaming control device 100
The probability of winning a jackpot is set to be low (special figure low probability), and the probability of winning a regular figure is also set to be low (general figure low probability).
In the present embodiment, a state with a low probability of regular electricity is assumed to be a state without general electricity support (state without support), and a state with a high probability of ordinary electricity is assumed to be a state with general electricity support (state with support). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal variable prize winning device 37 (normal power) is opened due to a winning of a general figure in a state with support, if the probability of a normal figure is low at the time of release, the state is in a state without support. becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the normally variable prize winning device 37 is considered to be in a supported state while it is open is also possible.

Further, in the normal game state, the performance mode is the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening 36, is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as the game ball firing mode. The main starting area in which the game ball is likely to win in the recommended firing mode becomes the first starting winning hole 36, and the main variation display game (main variation special figure) becomes the special figure 1 variation display game. The secondary start area where it is difficult for game balls to win in the recommended firing mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific gaming state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the probability of winning a common symbol to be high probability (high probability for a common symbol). In the specific game state, as the firing mode of the game ball, it is recommended that the normal variable prize winning device 37 be opened more easily, and that a right-handed shot aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in a specific game state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning hole 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. It will be a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, in a specific gaming state, if the number of time saving times is less than the standard number of times (here, 5 times) (
There are two cases: the number of time reductions ≦5), and a case where the number of time reductions is 99, which is greater than the standard number of times (number of time reductions = 99). The performance mode when the number of time reductions ≦ 5 is set as time saving mode #1, and the performance mode when the number of time reductions = 99 is set as time saving mode #2, and the game is played with different performance modes in time saving mode #1 and time saving mode #2. It can improve your interest. Note that the reference number of times may be, for example, the reciprocal of the small winning probability 1/8 (8 times), or may be 7 times or the like. The smaller the standard number of times is, the harder it is for small hits to occur in time-saving mode #1 (the one that becomes a jackpot state when V passes during a small win), while the more difficult it is for production mode #2
The difference becomes larger and the contrast becomes more sharp.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the specific gaming state (time saving state) ends. In the transition state, the remaining reservation generated by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general power) that is released by winning the normal figure in the specific gaming state is exhausted, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. Ru. The production mode in the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode. Furthermore, the remaining hold extinguishment mode has been changed to a mode before the end of the general power release due to a general map hit during a specific game state, and a mode after the general power release after the general power release is completed. You can divide it. In the mode before the power grid is opened, it is recommended to hit the right hand aiming at the power grid, and in the mode after the power grid is released, it is recommended to hit the left hand because the power grid is closed.

If the remaining hold extinguishment mode, which is the production mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the power line is opened and a mode after the power line is opened, the player can check whether the power line is open (should he hit right?) or whether it is closed. It becomes easier to understand whether the player is hitting left-handed or not. In addition, if it is not divided, it becomes easy to recognize that the remaining reservation is being used up through the transition state.

Further, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be combined into an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the performance mode may be the same without being separated.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game can be made a common performance mode. As described later, if a special figure hit occurs when the remaining reservation is used up (a big hit by passing V during a small hit), the player will receive a higher reward than if a special figure hit occurs during a specific gaming state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained even though it is unclear from the common performance mode whether the player is in a time saving state or the remaining reservation is being used up, making the player happy. . Note that here, the gaming value (privilege) is the number of time savings after the end of the jackpot, the number of jackpots finally obtained, and the like.

Next, transitions from each gaming state will be explained. First, in the normal game state, when a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs in the special symbol variable display game, a transition is made to a specific game state after the jackpot state ends.

In a specific game state, when a small hit (one that becomes a jackpot state when V passes) occurs in the special symbol variable display game, the state returns to the specific game state again after the jackpot state ends. In this case, returning to time saving mode #1, the number of time saving times as a gaming value (privilege) is equal to or less than the reference number of times (number of time saving times≦5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a transition is made from a specific gaming state to a transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the time saving number (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the special figure variation in the specific gaming state The total number of executions of the display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game) exceeds a second predetermined number of times (for example, twice the number of time savers) which is greater than the number of time savers (the first predetermined number of times); (
iii) The normal power supply disconnection is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, two times).

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, can be executed a number of times in a short time. If the only condition for transition from the specific game state is that the number of times exceeds the time saving number, the game machine 10 will deviate from the original specifications by the amount that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the subordinate variable display game, is executed. However, by providing two conditions (i) and (ii), it is possible to treat the execution of the secondary variable display game as a bonus (privilege) and allow the player to play the game according to the original specifications without causing any loss. It should be noted that if the player plays games normally, the transition state is entered when condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that condition (ii) is met. The reason for setting the condition (iii) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In addition, in the time saving mode #2 of the specific gaming state, it can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display game is executed for the number of time reduction times of 99 times, so a small hit (it becomes a jackpot state when V passes) will almost certainly occur. After the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, time saving mode #2 is the next continuation confirmation mode (
(determined mode).

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state where the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, in the transition state, if a small hit occurs (passing V during the small hit will result in a jackpot state), after the jackpot state ends, the time saving mode # of the specific gaming state
Transition to 2 and 99 time saving times are given. In other words, if a small hit (jackpot after passing V) occurs in the transition state where the remaining reservation is used up (remaining reservation consumption mode), the number of time reductions (≦ Compared to 5), the number of times the time is saved is greater, and the gaming value given to the player is greater. Furthermore, if a small hit (jackpot after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode), a small hit (jackpot after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time saving mode #2, so a total of two A jackpot is secured as a gaming value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54B is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. Note that the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 54B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 54B, the remaining reservations, which are all the special drawing 2 reservations that are consumed after the end of the time reduction, are divided into predetermined remaining reservations (first remaining reservations) and excessive reservations (second remaining reservations), and the production corresponding to the transition state is shown. The remaining reservation consumption mode as a mode is divided into a time-saving residual reservation consumption mode in which a predetermined remaining reservation is consumed, and an excessive reservation consumption mode in which excess reservation is consumed. Here, the predetermined remaining reservation is the first predetermined number (all or part of the special drawing 2 reservation) that occurs during the time reduction and is consumed after the time reduction ends, and is the excess reservation. is the special figure 2 reservation (remaining reservation) that is consumed after the predetermined remaining reservation. The excessive hold consumption mode may include, for example, a mode in which a result screen showing game results is displayed on the display device 41 and other special modes. In addition, the mode for extinguishing the remaining reservations that occurred during time reduction and the time reduction mode (time reduction mode #1 or time reduction mode #2) have the same feature in that they clear the special drawing 2 reservation that occurred during time reduction, so they are the same production mode. It may be shared.

[Time saving number and specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the pattern]
FIG. 55 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations), etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol fluctuation display game. The symbol is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either the stop symbol number or the stop symbol pattern. (A) relates to the winning symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game. The upper figure in (B) is about the winning symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game during the high probability state of the common figure (during the time saving state), and the lower figure is the variable display of the special figure 2 during the low probability state of the common figure. This relates to the winning symbols in the game (the winning symbols in the remaining hold).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by the jackpot symbol random number, and is a stop symbol of the jackpot in the special pattern 1 variable display game. Symbols B-F are also stop symbols determined by jackpot symbol random numbers, but they are jackpots related to the V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special symbol 2 variable display game in the normal symbol high probability state (during the time saving state). It is a stop pattern. Symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the jackpot symbol random number, but it is related to V passage (V prize winning) in the small hit (small win with remaining reservation) of the special pattern 2 variable display game during the low probability state of the regular pattern. This is the stop symbol for the jackpot. In addition, when there is a small winning pattern random number in addition to the jackpot pattern random number, it is also possible to configure the symbols BF and G to be the small winning stop symbols determined by the small winning pattern random number.

Symbol A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and symbol A is the only stop symbol for the jackpot in the special pattern 1 variable display game. Symbols B to F are allocated to jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10%, and 10%, respectively. For symbol G, distribution is 100%
It is.

In symbol A, which is the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is one. In addition, in the symbol A, the number of remaining reservations specified (scheduled) to be consumed after the end of the time saving state is 4. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 5 (=1+4) by regulation. For symbol A, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ }×100%=48.7% for the small hit probability of 1/8, and the fixed mode transition rate is (1 -1/8) x {1-(1-1/8) ⁴ } x 100% = 36.2%.

For symbols BF, which are the jackpot types of the special symbol 2 variable display game that started during the normal symbol high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively. be. Also, pattern B-
In F, the specified remaining reservation numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 10 for any of the symbols BF. For symbols B-F, the continuation rate is the same for each small hit probability of 1/8, which is {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ }×100%=73.7%, and it is confirmed The mode transition rates are 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%, respectively.
It becomes 61.2%.

In the symbol G, which is the type of jackpot (remaining pending jackpot) of the special symbol 2 variable display game started during the low probability state of ordinary symbols, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 99 times. In addition, for symbol G, the specified remaining number of reservations is 4. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 103. With symbol G, for a small hit probability of 1/8,
In each case, the continuation rate is approximately 100%, and the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0%. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the jackpot ends with the remaining reservation, the game shifts to the time saving mode #2 and the jackpot is reliably achieved again, after which the specific gaming state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, for symbol G, the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0
%, and in most cases the flow is a transition from time-saving mode #2 in a specific gaming state to time-saving mode #1 through a jackpot.

In addition, the continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 variable display game (within 5 times for symbol A, within 10 times for symbol B-F, and within 103 times for symbol G) after the end of the jackpot state. Yes, this is the probability of entering the specific gaming state again without passing through the normal gaming state (normal mode). The fixed mode transition rate is the probability of shifting from the remaining reserved consumption mode to the time saving mode #2 (determined mode, next continuation determined mode) by the special chart 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figure 2 reservations that are consumed after the end of the jackpot state (that is, the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the end of the jackpot state), and the total number of symbols BF is 10. The continuation rate in the case of is higher than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A whose total number is 5. Further, in the order of symbols BF, as the number of time reductions decreases and the specified remaining number of reservations increases, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

As mentioned above, in symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol that is the jackpot type (special result type), so the specific gaming state after the jackpot is set by lottery (distribution). The game has a variable time saving number (1 to 5) that changes randomly, which improves the interest of the game. Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations (5 to 9), which is the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the end of the specific game state, is changed in accordance with the number of time reductions. Therefore, the remaining number of reservations is also randomly and variablely set by lottery, which improves the interest of the game. In particular, if a difference is made in the gaming value between a jackpot in a specific gaming state and a jackpot with remaining reservations, players will be able to experience joys and sorrows depending on the number of remaining reservations set in the lottery, which will increase the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, regarding the winning symbols B-F of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in a specific gaming state, even if the number of time savers and the number of remaining reservations are variable, the total of the number of time savers and the number of remaining reservations is kept constant. (10) makes it possible to make the fixed mode transition rate variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific gaming state the same. As mentioned above, while the special figure 2 variable display game of the total number of time saving times and remaining reservation number is executed, that is, the same effect in the specific game state (time saving mode) and the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) When this mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether he is in the process of saving time or using up his remaining reservations, and he is surprised when he can obtain a large gaming value (99 times of saving time) by hitting the jackpot with the remaining reservations, which makes the game more interesting. will improve.

[Characteristics of general map fluctuation display game and general electric power operation]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general electric power operation.

As shown in Fig. 56 (A), there is only one type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol, symbol per common symbol) in the general pattern fluctuation display game, and the pattern is always the same for the normal pattern to open, and the winning state of the general pattern fluctuation display game is In this case, the normal variable winning device 37 (general electricity) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability of hitting a normal figure is 0/251 (0%) in the low probability state and 251/251 (1%) in the high probability state.
00%). Randomness is eliminated in the general figure fluctuation display game because it always hits in a high probability state and always misses in a low probability state. Note that the probability of winning a normal figure is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a normal figure is a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in a low probability state (normal gaming state, etc.)
But that's fine.

The starting memory number (pending number of general figures) of the general figure fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the general figure starting gate 34 is not activated during the winning state (normal electric power operation) and during fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the normal pattern start memory of the normal pattern variable display game is not stored. The normal pattern fluctuation display game can only be started while the stopped symbols are being stopped.If the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 during the stop display, a general pattern starting memory will be generated, but it will be immediately digested and the normal pattern fluctuation display game will start. starts. In this way, since the starting memory for the general figure fluctuation display game is not substantially stored, the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the general pattern variation display game or the normal pattern movement and the special pattern variation display game can easily be linked without any deviation, and this also leads to prevention of capture.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be set to 200 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The ordinary figure stop time (ordinary figure display time) is 48 msec. In a specific game state (time saving state, high probability state of regular figures), in order to link the regular figure fluctuation display game (and by extension the general figure movement) and the special figure fluctuation display game without any lag, the regular figure fluctuation time and the regular figure stop are set. It is preferable that the time is as short as possible. Assuming that the firing speed of game balls is 100 per minute, a game ball can pass through the normal figure starting gate 34 every 600 msec, so the time required for one normal figure fluctuation display game, that is, the normal figure starting gate 34, is The total of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably smaller than 600 msec.

Further, the maximum count number (upper limit value of count number) of general electricity is 10.

FIG. 56(B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (general electric), and the surroundings thereof. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration so that almost all the game balls hit right in time with the opening of the regular power line (opening of the regular power line) pass through the general figure starting gate 34 and win a prize in the regular power line.

First, in order to keep the winning rate (ratio of one game ball winning) to the normal variable winning device 37 constant when hitting right in time with the normal electricity release, we designed a structure that does not easily cause unevenness in the movement of the game ball. Obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed from the game area 32 around the starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 as much as possible. For example, in the game area 32, no obstacle nails 32a or structures are placed between the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37, or on the left and right sides. The obstacle nails 32a arranged almost directly above the normal figure starting gate 34 form a passage for the game balls in two rows, and prevent the game balls from leaking out from there. The passage formed by the two rows of obstacle nails 32a is gently connected to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

Further, the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in such a positional relationship that the game ball that has passed through the normal figure starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable winning device 37 is placed directly below the normal pattern starting gate 34. For example, by the time the game ball that has passed through the normal figure starting gate 34 reaches the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37
When opening the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37, the distance L (distance between the centers in the vertical direction) is determined by the average falling speed of the game ball and one normal figure. It may be larger than the product multiplied by the time required for the variable display game. However, the distance L is set to be such a short distance that even if the falling direction of the game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 deviates from the vertical, it will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Furthermore, in order to prevent unevenness in the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37, as mentioned above, the normal variable winning device 37 is preferably of a so-called tongue type in which the movable member 37b can be rotated so as to fall forward. .

FIG. 56(C) shows an opening pattern (normal electricity opening pattern) of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (normal electricity) of this embodiment. The general electricity release pattern indicates the operation mode of the general electricity supply per one general electricity supply. The normal power release pattern after the end of the jackpot state is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols A to G (that is, the type of jackpot). In addition, the numbers surrounded by a square frame are the control pointers (Fig. 41).
etc.) is the value.

In this embodiment, in the general power opening pattern for one general power grid, the general power is opened twice. Note that the general power line may be opened two or more times. Opening of general electricity is divided into first half opening and second half opening with a long interval in which the general electricity is closed. The normal power interval time (wait time), which is the interval time, is 60,000 msec, and the normal power open times of the first half open and the second half open are both 3,000 msec.

For example, if the firing speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, the game ball will reach the power line every 600msec, so it is possible to hit the power line five times during the first half opening of 3000msec, and the game ball will reach the power line every 600msec. After the interval, 5 during the second half opening of 3000 msec.
It is possible to win a prize. The special chart 2 reservations accumulated during the opening of the first half can be used up during the 60,000msec interval when the regular electricity is closed, and the number of special chart 2 reservations can be reduced to 0. A limited number (four in this case) of special map 2 reservations can be accumulated.

During the regular power interval (during the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time-saving number, the specific game state (time-saving state, general figure high probability state, support state) will be activated. It ends and becomes a low probability state (transition state). Then, the special map 2 reservations that were accumulated during the first half opening but are cleared after the end of the time saving state will become the remaining reservations, and in addition, the special diagram 2 reservations that are accumulated by winning on public electricity during the 3000 msec second half opening will also be the remaining reservations. becomes. In this way, even if you are in a low-probability state, you can accumulate a lot of remaining reserves by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving the one-time normal pattern winning (specific result) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, it is possible to convert the normal fluctuation winning device 37 into the open state multiple times, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game The normal fluctuating prize winning device 37 can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state where the probability of winning a winning symbol is high and the low probability state where the probability is low. Therefore, even if the probability of winning a common symbol is low, the variable winning device 37 can be changed to the open state and the special symbol 2 reservation can be accumulated, which can please the player and improve the interest of the game. do.

Further, when the first half of the general electricity line is opened, the special symbol 2 reservation can be stored and used at intervals, and when the general electricity is opened in the second half, the special symbol 2 reservation can be stored again and used after the general electricity operation ends.
Therefore, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than the upper limit value of 4 for the number of reserved special drawings 2, and the number of remaining reservations can also be made variable by making the number of time reductions variable.

〔Timing chart〕
Figures 57 to 59 show the game status, normal pattern probability (probability of normal pattern winning), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, number of special pattern 2 reservations, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation), etc. after the jackpot. FIG. Note that time elapses as you go to the right in the timing chart. 57 is after the jackpot with symbol A, FIG. 58 is after the jackpot with symbol B, and FIG. 59 is after the jackpot with symbol B.
This is related to after the symbol F hits the jackpot.

Regarding the situation after hitting the jackpot with symbols BF, the only difference is the timing at which the normal pattern high probability state (specific gaming state) changes to the normal pattern low probability state due to the difference in the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations. , only symbols B and F are illustrated. Game state and normal figure probability 2
The other features are common to all symbols BF.

In addition, FIGS. 57 to 59 show the passing of a game ball through the general figure starting gate 34 (general figure gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (general figure) (starting). Mouth 2
Detection of switch 37a) is also shown as a pulse. In Figures 57 to 59, the passage of the game ball through the gate, the state of the game, the state of the game, and the state and change of winning the game (winning the game) are the same, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate. .

In FIGS. 57-59, a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending where the ending performance is executed, the player hits the right ball as prompted by the right-hand hitting instruction display, and the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (at the beginning of Fig. 57). (indicated by pulses), the normal pattern (normal pattern) changes on the normal pattern display 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed, and then stops. Here, since the normal pattern is in a low probability state when the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, it stops moving.

Here, the jackpot ending ends when the common symbol misses and stops, and the state becomes a high probability state with a common symbol probability, and corresponding to the specific gaming state (time saving mode #1) of FIG. 54A, the right-handed hitting state with support become. At the beginning of the right-handed hitting state with support (normal pattern high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the fluctuation of the normal pattern starts. Then, since it is a high probability state with a probability of 100% for a common symbol, the common symbol is hit and the general electricity operation starts, and the first half is opened and the common electricity is opened. In the open state where the general electricity is opened, the game ball that passes through the general figure starting gate 34 enters the general electricity as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 hold is generated, the special figure 2 hold is exhausted, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 holds becomes 0.

As mentioned above, the game control device 100 controls the variable time (execution time) of the special figure 2 variable display game.
and the stop display time are controlled based on the number of times the special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of times the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed) from the end of the jackpot state (the fluctuation start information setting process in Figure 23 and the special figure fluctuations in Figure 24). medium processing). In addition, the game control device 100 sets the variable time and stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game to three different types: after the end of the jackpot for symbol A, after the end of the jackpot for symbols BF, and after the end of the jackpot for symbol G. Set it as follows.

After the jackpot of symbol A in FIG. 57, the fluctuation time is set to be long enough so that the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game continues at least until the end of the normal power operation, that is, the end of the second half opening. In Figure 57, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the general power operation time (660
00 msec, 66 seconds), but it may be the normal power operation time plus a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds). In this way, in response to (combined) the normal operation including the open state twice.
, the first special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 variable display game, the upper limit of 4 special figure 2 reservations is accumulated.

Since the number of time savings after the jackpot of symbol A is 1, when the first special pattern 2 variable display game ends, the specific gaming state (time saving mode) ends and becomes the regular pattern low probability state, and the transition state ( Transition to remaining pending consumption mode). In the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode), the special symbol 2 fluctuation display game based on the special symbol 2 reservation that has been saved as remaining reservation is executed four times in a much shorter fluctuation time than the first time (the second to fifth Special figure 2 variable display game). These 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed variable time.

After the jackpot of symbol B in FIG. 58, the first special symbol 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the opening of the first half of the general electricity and continues until after the end. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is approximately the same as the normal power open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but the details of the fluctuation time will be explained in relation to FIG. 62. . In response to (combined with) the opening of the first half of public electricity, the first special map 2 variable display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special map 2 variable display game, the upper limit of 4 pieces of special map 2 pending will be displayed. Can be saved. All of the 4 reserved special symbols 2 will be used up during the interval when the public electricity is closed, and during the interval, the special symbol 2 variable display game will be executed 4 times with a much shorter variation time than the first time (2 ~5th special figure 2 variable display game). These 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed variable time.

Since the number of time saving times after the jackpot of symbol B is 5, when the 5th special figure 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends and the regular figure low probability state is entered, and the transition state ( Transition to remaining pending consumption mode). In the transition state (remaining hold extinguishment mode), the general electricity is opened as the latter half is opened. As soon as one Tokuzu 2 reservation is generated as a remaining reservation due to winning on the open state general public network, the Tokuzu 2 reservation will be extinguished, the 6th Tokuzu 2 variable display game will start, and the number of Tokuzu 2 reservation will be becomes 0.

In response to (combined with) the opening of the second half of the general electricity network, the 6th special map 2 variable display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special map 2 variable display game, the upper limit of 4 pieces of special map 2 pending will be displayed. Can be saved. 6
The second special map 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half opening of the general electricity grid and continues until after the end. In Figure 58, the variation time of the 6th special figure 2 variation display game is the normal power opening time (30
00 msec, 3 seconds), the details will be explained in conjunction with FIG. 62.

After the 6th special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the 4 reserved special figures 2 is executed 4 times in a considerably shorter variation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7-1
0th special map 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize the specified remaining number of 5 pieces corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed short variable time, and the variable time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variable display games (especially the variable time during the time saving state) A fixed variable time of the same or shorter length is sufficient. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at a good tempo and with the same rhythm, and the remaining reservations can be quickly used up. In addition, the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games have nothing to do with saving up just by using the special figure 2 hold, so they are played at a variable variable time that is selected by the distribution of the variable pattern (lottery). Then, the game becomes less monotonous. In addition, the variation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games is made longer than the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games (especially the variation time during the time saving state), so that it can be handled slowly. You can also perform a performance.

In addition, when the second half of the general electric power line is opened, the general electric power line hitting state ends and the general electric power line starting gate 34 (
The normal pattern fluctuation display game can be executed by passing the game ball through the normal pattern gate), but since the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in a low probability state where the probability of winning a normal pattern is 0%, no result will occur in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, the stoppage after the end of the common map hit state corresponds to the general power remaining ball processing time and the general map ending time.

After the jackpot of symbol F in Fig. 59, the passage of the game ball through the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, the general pattern prize, the number of special pattern 2 reservations, and the special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation). The appearance and changes are the same as after the jackpot of symbol B in FIG. 58. However, because the number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations are different between symbols B and F, the timing of changing from the specific gaming state (high probability state of ordinary symbols) to the transition state (low probability state of ordinary symbols, remaining reservation consumption mode) is different. .

After the jackpot of symbol F, when the first special symbol 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends, becomes the regular symbol low probability state, and transitions to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). . After that, similarly to after the jackpot of symbol B, the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed nine times, and the specified remaining number of reservations of nine can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time in response to the open state of the general power line, and the special figure 2 variable display game in response to the closed state (interval) of the general power line. A two-variable display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, when the first half of the general electricity line is opened, the special figure 2 reservation can be accumulated and used at intervals, and when the general electricity is opened in the second half, the special figure 2 reservation can be stored again and used after the general electricity operation ends. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2, which is four, and the number of remaining reservations can also be made variable by making the number of time reductions variable.

Although it is not shown after the jackpot of symbol G, for example, when the special symbol 2 variable display game repeats the general power operation, it may change to a short fixed period like the 2nd to 5th and 7th to 10th times in Figures 57 to 59. It may be executed as many times as the time saving number (99 times) and the remaining number (4 times) with variable time. In addition, the pattern G
If the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot is fixed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the variable time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous.

[Measures against misalignment]
Here, as a countermeasure for the discrepancy between the start timing of the normal power release (normal power operation) after the end of the jackpot state and the start timing of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game, we will explain the appropriate time values regarding the special chart 2 fluctuation display game and the general power operation. think about.

FIGS. 60 and 61 are time charts showing examples 1 and 2 of the occurrence of a lag between the start timing of the general power release and the start timing of the special symbol 2 variable display game. Note that FIGS. 60 and 61 are similar to FIG.
8, it shows the situation after the jackpot of symbol B (time saving number 5 times, specified remaining number of reservations 5 pieces).

In FIG. 60, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (normal pattern gate) at the jackpot ending (jackpot state) before the specific game state and the normal pattern fluctuation display game (loss variation) starts, the normal pattern fluctuation The display game may have a longer fluctuating time than the time-saving state. In this case, in a specific game state, even if the next game ball passes through the general pattern gate, the general pattern fluctuation display game cannot start, and when the next game ball passes through the general pattern gate, the general pattern fluctuation display game finally changes. When the display game (win variation) starts, the start timing of the general power release is shifted later (shift <1>) than when it starts immediately after the jackpot ending (FIG. 58).

In addition, in Fig. 60, when the jackpot is repeated, the special drawing 2 reservation before the jackpot state is carried over after the jackpot state, and when the jackpot state ends, the special drawing 2 changes immediately without waiting for the general power to be released. A display game is started. Then, the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is shifted earlier than when the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the general electricity is released (FIG. 58) (shift <2>).

If deviation <1> and deviation <2> occur at the same time, 1
The start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is greatly shifted forward (forward shift). Then, as shown in Figure 60, the 6th long-time special figure 2 variable display game also deviates significantly from the opening of the second half of the general electricity, and the 7th and 8th special figure 2 variable display games occur during the latter half of the opening. During the opening of the second half, there are more winnings than in Figure 58, and one extra special drawing 2 is held. Therefore, the actual number of remaining reservations is 6, which is one more than the specified number of remaining reservations of 5.

In Figure 61, if the special drawing 1 reservation that occurred during or before the jackpot state is carried over after the jackpot state, and there is no special drawing 2 reservation at the end of the jackpot state (number of special drawing 2 reservations = 0), the jackpot state The special figure 1 variable display game is started immediately at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is shifted later than when it is started immediately after the normal power is released (FIG. 58).

That is, the start timing of the first special figure 2 variable display game is significantly delayed from the start timing of the regular power release (later shift). Then, as shown in Figure 61, 5
At the same time as the 6th special chart 2 variable display game is executed, the 6th long-time special chart 2 variable display game is delayed significantly from the start of the second half opening of general electricity, and the special chart 2 pending that accumulates during the second half opening is delayed. 3
Only 1 item can be saved, leaving 1 item short of 4 items. Therefore, the actual number of remaining reservations is 4, which is one less than the specified number of remaining reservations of 5.

In particular, unlike the special pattern 2 pending priority consumption (special pattern 2 priority variation) of this embodiment, in the case of special pattern 1 pending priority consumption, the start timing of the first special pattern 2 variation display game is largely delayed. It will happen.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a countermeasure against deviations that prevents excess or deficiency of special drawing 2 reservation due to the above-mentioned front deviation and rear deviation and eliminates the difference between the actual remaining number of reservations and the specified remaining number of reservations. Figure 62 and Figure 58
Corresponding to this, the state after the jackpot of symbol B (time saving number 5 times, specified remaining number of reservations 5 pieces) is shown.

As a countermeasure against the deviation, the fluctuation time Ta of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a value equal to the first half's normal power opening time plus a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds). In addition, the general power interval time Tb is
The value is the time required for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to fluctuate four times in a short fixed fluctuation time plus a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds). For example, the time required to fluctuate four times is (fixed fluctuation time + fixed stop display time) x 4. Furthermore, the variation time Tc of the 6th special figure 2 variation display game is set to a larger value than the normal power opening time in the latter half.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts showing the effect of the misalignment countermeasure on the front misalignment (effect 1) and the effect on the posterior misalignment (effect 2), respectively.

In FIG. 63, even if the opening of the first half of the general electricity grid is delayed from the first special figure 2 variable display game due to the front shift of the first special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is Ta
However, since it is longer by the margin (several seconds to ten-odd seconds) than the opening time for general electricity in the first half (3000 msec, 3 seconds), it is possible to absorb the delay in opening the first half of general electricity. In other words, special figure 2 before the jackpot state
Due to the carryover of the hold, the first half of the regular power line is opened while the first special figure 2 variable display game starts immediately after the end of the jackpot state and continues for a long time.

Moreover, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed four or more times with a short fixed variable time during the general electric power interval time Tb which is the period when the electric power electrician is in the closed state. For this reason, by the time the second half of the public power line opens, the special number 2 reservation will always be 0, and winning the first public power line in the second half of the second half opening will be the start of the special map 2 variable display game. The effect of the delay in opening the first half of the is eliminated.

Furthermore, in order to make the fluctuation time Tc of the 6th special map 2 fluctuation display game a larger value than the normal electricity opening time in the second half, the special map 2 reservations will accumulate up to the upper limit of 4, and the actual remaining amount will be increased during the second half opening. Differences between the reservation and the specified number of remaining reservations can be suppressed.

In FIG. 64, even if the first special figure 2 variable display game is delayed with respect to the opening of the first half of the general electricity grid due to a later shift, it can be absorbed during the long general electricity interval time Tb. For this reason, by the time the second half of the public power line opens, the number of special map 2 reservations will always be 0, and the first winning ticket on the public power line in the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the opening period will be the special number two.
Since this is the start of the variable display game, the influence of the delay of the first special figure 2 variable display game is erased.

In addition, as a countermeasure for other backward deviations, since the backward deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game is caused by the special figure 1 variable display game executed in a specific gaming state, the time value of the special figure 1 variable display game ( (Fluctuating time and stop display time) may be made to vary in an extremely short time so that the special map 2 variable display game can always be started during the opening of the first half of the regular electricity line. As a very short-time variation, unlike FIG. 64, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be made even shorter than the short fixed variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in a specific game state.

In addition, in the first place, in this embodiment, since the special figure 2 pending priority expulsion (special figure 2 priority variation) is to execute the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, in a specific game state Since the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed only once at most, special figure 2 pending priority consumption itself is a countermeasure against the delay.

[Countermeasures against stopping]
FIG. 65 is a time chart illustrating a method of increasing the actual number of remaining reservations by stopping the number of reservations than the specified number of remaining reservations. FIG. 65 corresponds to FIG. 58 and shows the state after the jackpot of symbol B (time saving number 5 times, specified remaining number of reservations 5).

In FIG. 64, when the first half of the general electric car is open, only four ordinary electric cars are allowed to win by stopping, and a maximum of five pieces are not allowed to win. In other words, only 4 special map 2 reservations occur during the opening of the first half of the regular electricity line,
It will not be generated up to the maximum (5 times corresponding to the specified number of time reductions). For this reason, the fifth rotation of the predetermined number of time reductions does not start, and unlike FIGS. 58 and 62, the probability of hitting a regular symbol does not fall to a low probability during the interval of regular electricity.

Due to the second general electricity operation (the second general pattern hit), the fifth special pattern 2 is activated while the general electricity is open in the first half.
The fluctuating display game begins and the low probability state of the regular symbols finally occurs, but since the regular symbols are already in operation, the regular symbol operation continues until the opening of the second half, and the special symbol 2 reservation can be generated. In this way, the life of the high-probability state of the general power grid is extended by the stop shot, and the power grid operates twice, so the number of remaining reservations can be reduced by several (
(here 4 pieces) can be increased.

FIG. 66 is a time chart illustrating the countermeasure against stopping. Game control device 100
In a specific gaming state, when the second half of the general electricity operation ends (when the general electricity operation ends), that is, when the general electricity operation ends the specified number of times (two times), End a specific gaming state. For example, the process of remaining bulbs on general electricity (Fig. 42) or the process of ending per normal electricity (Fig. 43)
), by providing a processing step of setting the number of time reduction fluctuations to 0, the game control device 100 can end the specific game state when the second half opening ends.

This corresponds to transition condition (iii) for transitioning from a specific gaming state to a transition state, which was explained earlier in relation to FIG. 54A, and when transition condition (iii) is satisfied, the specific gaming state (time saving mode) is After completion, it transitions to a transition state (remaining pending mode). Note that if there is no special figure 2 pending when ending the specific gaming state due to the end of the second half opening, the transition state (remaining pending mode) is skipped and the transition is made to the normal gaming state (normal mode) in FIG. 54A.

In this way, as shown in Figure 65, although the number of special figure 2 fluctuations has not reached the number of shortened times (5 times in this case), the normal power operation is triggered by the end of one normal power operation (the end of the second half opening). Since the probability of hitting a figure has fallen to a low probability, there will be no second normal figure hit and no second normal current operation. For this reason, the advantage of stopping the game is lost, and the player no longer plays the game stopping game.

In addition, as another stop shot, if the special figure 2 reservation before the jackpot state is carried over after the jackpot state, if you do not launch the game ball until this special figure 2 reservation is all consumed, the remaining reservation may increase. . As a countermeasure against this, after the game ball is detected by the gate switch 34a of the normal pattern start gate 34 after the jackpot state ends, the special pattern 2 variable display game may be started.

[How to play instructions display]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a hitting method instruction display that suggests (instructs) the player how to launch the game ball on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 67, the manner of displaying how to play may be changed in stages. In particular, although FIG. 67 shows how the right-handed hitting instruction display changes stepwise, the left-handed hitting instruction display may similarly change stepwise.

In FIG. 67, during the jackpot (during the jackpot round) and when the normal power is open, the big prize opening (special variable winning device) and the general power (normal variable winning device 37) are opened, so the player can profit by hitting right. There is. Therefore, during the jackpot (during the jackpot round) and during the general electricity release, the production control device 3
00, the right-handed batting instruction display is displayed in a large format to make it conspicuous. However, in other jackpot endings and during the interval (closed state) of public electricity, there is not much benefit to hitting right even when hitting right, so it is not necessarily necessary to shoot the game ball right-handed. For this reason, during the jackpot ending or the interval of general electricity, the performance control device 300 displays the right hit instruction display in a small and inconspicuous manner.

Immediately before the opening of the first half and immediately before the opening of the second half of the public power line, the production control device 300 gradually changes the mode of the right-handed instruction display, which is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner, to start the opening of the first half and the opening of the second half. displayed in a large and conspicuous manner at the beginning of or immediately after. As a result, the player can start hitting the game ball right-handed in preparation for the opening of the first half before the opening of the first half, and also start launching the game ball hitting the right-handed in preparation for the opening of the second half before the opening of the second half. You can start launching. Therefore, it is possible to securely accumulate a specified number of reserved special drawings 2 by repeating winnings on general electric lines when the general electric lines are opened in the first half and the second half, and the specified number of remaining reserved figures can be achieved.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise change in the batting instruction display (here, right-handed batting instruction display).

(A) is the same as the stepwise change shown in FIG. 67, but as shown by the solid line arrow, the arrow-shaped right-hand hitting instruction display changes stepwise (3 steps) from an inconspicuous small aspect. It becomes a large and noticeable aspect. In addition, conversely, as shown by the dotted line arrow, immediately before the jackpot ending or just before the general electricity interval, a conspicuous large aspect may be changed in stages (three stages) to an inconspicuous small aspect.

In (B), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-hand hitting instruction display starts from an inconspicuous white outline, then partially (gradually) is colored in red etc. in multiple stages (3 stages), and the overall It becomes colored and stands out. On the other hand, as shown by the dotted arrow, just before the jackpot ending or just before the power grid interval, the game changes from a conspicuous colored appearance to an inconspicuous white appearance in stages (3 stages). It's okay to be.

In (C), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-hand hitting instruction display changes from an inconspicuous white (white outline) to a conspicuous color in stages (three stages), from blue to yellow, and then to a conspicuous red. Become a form. Note that the color change may be from a light color (low saturation) to a dark color (high saturation), or from a dark color (low brightness) to a bright color (high brightness). It may change. Conversely, as shown by the dotted arrow, just before the jackpot ending or just before the power grid interval, the color changes from a conspicuous red color to a less conspicuous white color in stages (in 3 stages). Good too.

[Example of screen transition]
FIGS. 69A to 69D are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the first embodiment. The presentation on the display device 41 is controlled by the presentation control device 300. Note that FIG. 69 corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the jackpot with symbol B).

In (A), a jackpot round effect is executed in the last jackpot round (10R) during the jackpot. Since there is an advantage to hitting right, an arrow-shaped right hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner.

Next, in (A), a jackpot ending effect is executed at the jackpot ending after the last jackpot round. Even if the player is in a right-handed hitting state, there is not much benefit in hitting right-handed, so the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a small and unnoticeable manner.

Next, (c) shows the state before the start of the special symbol fluctuation display game in the time saving state after the jackpot ending. The production mode is time saving mode #1. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number ``0'' indicating the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held are displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special drawing 2 reservation number displaying section 660, respectively. The number "0" is displayed. Since the player is in a right-handed hitting state with support (general figure high probability state) and the regular power line is immediately released, the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. Note that, as described above, the aspect of the right-hand hitting instruction display 551 that was displayed in a small size may be changed in stages to a larger aspect.

The game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, but since it is in a high probability state with a 100% normal pattern probability, it hits the normal pattern and the normal power operation starts, and the first half is opened (first half of the first half is opened). (Normal power open)
Public electricity will be opened as a result.

Then, in (d), the game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34 while the regular line is open enters the regular line as it is, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. At the start of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, the effect corresponding to the time saving mode #1 is set by the variable effect setting process (FIG. 52).

Then, as identification information, the fluctuation (↓↓↓) of the special decorative design (large design) is displayed in the fluctuation display area 61.
0 indicates that it is being executed, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is being executed in the variation display area 615 as identification information. In the left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol (decoration first symbol A), right symbol (decoration first symbol B), and middle symbol (decoration first symbol C) are displayed, respectively. It's changing. Each decorative special pattern (left pattern, right pattern, middle pattern) consists of a rectangular frame (frame image) and a number (number image), but may be a character (character image) instead of the rectangular frame. Within the frame, the color of the numbers is different from the color of the parts other than the numbers. Also, in (d), each decorative special symbol is changing at a high movement speed (high-speed fluctuation), but by hiding (deleting) the frame image (or character image), only the numbers change. It's fine. Further, each decorative special symbol may be displayed in a thin, semi-transparent manner during high-speed fluctuation.

In the second pending display section 530b (standby area) that displays the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) before the variable display game is executed as a second pending display, a pending display 533 is displayed due to a winning on a general electric train.
(second hold display) is displayed momentarily, but immediately the hold extinguishment area 540 in the rectangular frame on the left
(hold shift). In the hold extinguishment area 540, a hold while changing display 533b indicating a hold while changing (the starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure changing display game) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed. Note that the first suspension display section 530a that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) as the first pending display (first starting memory display) is not displayed here.

After that, in (E), while the first half of the regular train is open, special drawing 2 reservations occur one after another due to winnings on the regular train, and the reservation display 533 corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation is displayed one after another in the second reservation display section 530b. will be displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 each have the following information:
The number ``0'' indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number ``3'' indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 are displayed. In addition, an enemy character 554 (tadpole) that will be fought in a later battle performance (battle performance) appears, and an ally character 557 also appears. As a dialogue performance, the enemy character 554's dialogue ``It's a game'' is displayed in text, and the ally character 557's dialogue ``Increase in reservations'' is displayed in characters in response to the increase in special map 2 reservations. The lines may be output as audio from a speaker.

Then, in (f), in response to the fact that the upper limit of 4 special drawings 2 is stored, the line "Filling completed" of the ally character 557 is displayed in text. Special drawing 2 reserved number display section 660
The number "4" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 is displayed.

Next, in (ki), the first half opening (first half general electricity opening) ends, and the first special symbol 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state ends and the stop symbol "1, 8, 2" are displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615. Since it is during the normal power interval (in the closed state), there is not much benefit to hitting the right hand even if the player is in the right hand hitting state, and the right hand hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner.

In addition, here, as a pre-reading effect (pending change notice), the normal mode of the pending display 533 changes to a mode (character) indicating the expectation level of winning the jackpot in the variable display game of special drawing 2 pending, and the pending display 533d- It becomes 533g. For example, the level of expectation for a character can be determined by the pending display 5.
33e>Hold display 533d>Hold display 533g>Hold display 533f.

After that, in (h), the special figure 2 hold on the hold display 533d is exhausted, and the second special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state has a much shorter variation time than the first special figure 2 variable display game. It is executed during the public power interval. In addition, the number "3" indicating the number of special drawings 2 reserved is displayed on the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660. Further, the second hold display section 530b has moved to the upper right side, but the hold display 533d has disappeared.

In the pending expiration area 540, a pending pending display 533b corresponding to the pending display 533d is displayed. The floating hold display 533b (▽) has a different form from the character-shaped hold display 533, but may have the same form. If the mode is different, it is easy to display the floating pending display 533b in the narrow pending consumption area 540, and if the mode is the same, the pending (before consumption) pending display 533 is easy to display.
It is easy to understand the relationship between the change pending display 533b being digested.

In the center of the screen, the character with the pending display 533d becomes an ally character 557,
As a battle effect, attack the enemy character 554 (act on the enemy character 554),
A beam (ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554. The enemy character 554 that appears during the interval of the general public line is the one that appeared in (O) and (F) during the opening of the first half of the public electric line, so continuity of the performance is maintained. Note that, instead of becoming the character 557, the hold display 533d imitating the character may directly act on the enemy character 554 to compete. In this case, in (h), the pending consumption area 540 and the changing pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (ch) etc. described later).

Thereafter, in (k), the third special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the regular power interval in a short variable time after the end of the second special figure 2 variable display game. In the hold extinguishing area 540, a changing hold display 533b corresponding to the hold display 533e is displayed. In addition, the number "2" indicating the number of special drawings 2 reserved is displayed on the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660. Furthermore, the hold display 533e has disappeared from the second hold display section 530b.

On the screen, the character with the pending display 533e becomes a sub-character 558a (helper character, auxiliary character) who supports the ally character 557, and supports the enemy character 5.
Participate in 54's attack and use the beam (
rays, effects) are emitted to the enemy character 554. Note that when participating in an attack, the beam shape of the sub-character 558a is changed so that it can be recognized that it has participated in the attack.
The mode of the beam is different from that of the friendly character 557. In addition, the sub-character 558a
Instead, the hold display 533e imitating the character directly displays the enemy character 55.
4 may be used for a battle (the same applies to the hold displays 533f and 533g below).
In this case, from (k) to (s), the pending consumption area 540 and the changing pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (t) to (g), etc. described later).

In addition, the character of the hold display 533 in the second hold display section 530b and the sub-character 5
The character 58 is displayed in a smaller size or in monochrome or a lighter color so as to be less noticeable than the character 557, which is the main character. This makes it easier to recognize which character is the main character.

Subsequently, in (C), the fourth special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the regular power interval with a short variable time after the third special figure 2 variable display game ends. . In the hold extinguishing area 540, a changing hold display 533b corresponding to the hold display 533f is displayed. In addition, the number "1" indicating the number of special drawings 2 reserved is displayed on the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660. Further, the hold display 533f has disappeared from the second hold display section 530b.

On the screen, the character with the pending display 533f becomes a sub-character 558b who supports the ally character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and shoots a beam ( ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554.

Subsequently, in (sa), the 5th special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the regular power interval with a short variable time after the end of the 4th special figure 2 variable display game. . In the hold extinguishing area 540, a pending hold display 533b during change corresponding to the hold display 533g is displayed. In addition, the number "0" indicating the number of special drawings 2 reserved is displayed on the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660. Furthermore, the hold display 533g has disappeared from the second hold display section 530b.

On the screen, the character with the pending display 533g becomes a sub-character 558c who supports the ally character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and joins the ally character 557 (main character) and the sub-characters 558a and 558b. A beam (ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554.

Next, in (b), the fifth special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state ends, and the losing stop symbols "7, 2, 3" are displayed in the variable display areas 610, 615. Further, as a result, the time saving state (time saving mode #1) ends and a transition state (normal probability low probability state) in which the remaining reservation can be used is entered. After that, the second half opening (second half opening of general electricity) starts and general electricity is released.

Subsequently, in (S), the game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34 while the regular electric line is open enters the regular electric line as it is, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. Here, it is a right-handed hitting state without support (normal pattern low probability state), but since the regular power is released as the second half is opened, the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. Note that, as described above, the aspect of the right-hand hitting instruction display 551 that was displayed in a small size may be changed in stages to a larger aspect.

Here, since the time-saving state with a high probability of public power has ended and the player may not be able to clearly recognize that the public power train is open, the text "Aim for public power" is displayed and the game board 30 You may display the general electric power position image 561 which schematically shows the position of the general electric power line in .

In addition, in the following (S) to (N), the remaining reservation is exhausted in the transition state after the end of the time saving state, so that the special figure 2 variable display game from the 6th to the 10th time after the end of the jackpot state is executed. This shows how it is done. In FIGS. 69C and 69D, from (S) to (NA) in the transition state
Now, assuming that the advantageous state advantageous to the player continues from the time saving state as described above, the same performance mode (common performance mode) as the time saving mode #1 in the time saving state is used. Therefore, from (S) to (N), the same effects as from (E) to (C) are performed.

In other words, from (S) to (SO) during the second half of the general public network opening, an effect that accumulates four special map 2 reservations (remaining reservations) is executed in response to the 6th special map 2 fluctuation display game, and the second half of the opening ends. From the latter (ta) to (
In (4), while the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games are being executed, the battle effect corresponding to each special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In this way, if the time saving state and the transition state are set to the same production mode, it is difficult to recognize whether the time saving state or the remaining reservation is being used up due to the common presentation mode. A win can result in a large gaming value, making the player happy.

An example of switching from the time saving mode #1 in the time saving state to another remaining reservation consumption mode in the transition state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69E and 69F.

From (S) to (S), the opening of the second half of general electricity service (later opening of general electricity service) will be maintained, and the
The special figure 2 variable display game is executed for the second time, and the special figure 2 reservation is increased as the remaining reserve. after that,
From (ta) to (na), the 4 special tickets 2 reservations (remaining reservations) accumulated in the second half of the release are 1 from the 7th time.
It is consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game up to the 0th time. Note that after (n), the game enters the normal game state and the production mode also changes to the normal mode.

In addition, the enemy character 554 that appears after the start of the second half of the public power transmission is the one that appeared from (e) to (c) in the time saving mode, and the continuity of the performance with time saving mode #1 is maintained. . Also, (S) to (Na) have the same effect as (E) to (C), but (C)
The lines of the enemy character 554 and the ally character 557 (main character),
The character of the hold display 533 may be different from the time saving mode #1. In addition, after (T), the right-handed batting state changes to the left-handed batting state due to the end of the second half opening, and the left-handed batting instruction display 552
is displayed in a small, inconspicuous manner. In addition, while the special drawing 2 hold is exhausted as shown in (T) to (G), a hitting instruction display (here, left hitting instruction display 552) is displayed to prevent the player from being confused. Instead, the hitting instruction display may be displayed from after the special figure 2 pending is all exhausted and the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (n).

In addition, (d) to (ne) indicate the case where the 8th special figure 2 variable display game in (tsu) becomes a small hit (jackpot after passing V) or a jackpot, and in (d) it becomes SP reach and movie production is executed. Note that in the movie, an effect may be performed in which the enemy character 554 (tadpole) explodes and disappears.

Further, in (d), the left-handed hitting instruction display 552 changes from a conspicuous color (red) to a less conspicuous color (blue) so as not to interfere with the movie production, etc. Also, in (d), hold display 5
The aspect of 33g may be returned to the original aspect (▽). Further, in (d), the hold display 533, the hold extinguishing area 540, and the changing hold display 533b may be hidden so as not to interfere with the movie production or the like.

Subsequently, at (J), a stop symbol for a small win or a jackpot is displayed, and at (N), a fanfare effect for a small win or a jackpot is executed.

An example of the performance on the display device 41 after the jackpot for symbols B has been described above with reference to FIGS. )
The same effect as in FIGS. 69A to 69D is executed only earlier than . For example, after the symbol F hits the jackpot, the time saving state ends at point (g).

In addition, after the jackpot of symbol A, the effect of accumulating special drawing 2 reservations from (e) to (f) will be executed until the end of the second half of the regular electricity operation (the end of the general electricity operation), and from (g) to (s). It is sufficient to omit the effects up to this point and execute the effects after (t) after the second half opening ends. Moreover, after the jackpot of symbol G, for example, the performances from (e) to (sa) may be repeated until the end of the time saving state.

[Another example of screen transition]
FIGS. 69E and 69F are other examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the first embodiment. (S1) to (N1) in FIGS. 69E and 69F are replaced with (S) to (N) in FIGS. 69C and 69D described above. This other example also corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the jackpot of symbol B).

In the transition states (S1) to (N1), unlike the above-mentioned (S) to (N), after the time saving state ends, the production mode changes to the remaining pending consumption mode (which is different from the time saving mode #1 in the time saving state). Figure 5
4A). As shown by hatching, in the remaining hold consumption mode, the screen background may be different from that in the time saving mode #1 in relation to the change in the presentation mode. Therefore, from (S1) to (N1)
In this case, different effects from (d) to (c) are performed.

From (S1) to (S1), the opening of the second half of the general electricity grid (later opening of the general electricity grid) is maintained, the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the special chart 2 reservation is held as the remaining reservation. To increase. Note that the enemy character 554 changes from the character (tadpole) of time saving mode #1 from (c) to (sa) to another character (UFO) in connection with the change in production mode.
The rest are the same as (S) to (S).

After that, from (Ta 1) to (Na 1), 4 special drawings 2 reservations (remaining reservations) accumulated in the second half opening
is consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game from the 7th to the 10th time. In addition,(
After n1), the game enters the normal game state and the production mode also changes to the normal mode.

In (T1) to (N1), the hold display 533d-53 in the second hold display section 530b
3g is displayed in a bullet-like manner, different from (ta) to (na). Then, the ally character 557 displayed from (S1) to (S1) gets into and combines with (acts on and combines with) another ally character, the tank character 563, and the enemy character 554 ( UF
A production in which O) is shot down with a bullet is performed. In addition, as a pending change notice, the aspect (color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the pending displays 533d to 533g in the second pending display section 530b may be changed according to the expectation level of the jackpot.

Every time a new special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the hold display 533 imitating a bullet in the second hold display section 530b is erased, and the tank character 563 is replaced by the enemy character 554 (U
It is possible to perform an effect as if it were used for bombarding FO). The erased pending display 533 becomes the floating pending display 533b in the pending consumption area 540, but the floating pending display 533b (▽
) is in a different form from the suspension display 533 imitating a bullet.

In addition, (D1) to (N1) are different from (D1) to (N1), except for the mode of pending display 533g.
Since it is the same as , the explanation will be omitted. In addition, in the movie (D1), enemy character 5
54 (UFO) may be shot down and fall down.

Note that from (T1) onwards, the second half of the general electricity is opened and the player is left-handed.
As shown in A, the remaining hold extinguishment mode as a production mode is the mode before the end of normal electricity release from (S1) to (S1), and the mode from (T1) to (NA1) (or (NU1)). It is divided into modes after the normal electricity is released. For this reason, the background images (shown by hatching) from (S1) to (S1) and (T1)
The background images (indicated by shading) etc. from (Na1) (or (Nu1)) are different, resulting in different presentation modes. In addition, the enemy character 554 in the mode before the end of the general electricity release and the mode after the end of the general electricity release
It is also possible to have commonality in the effects, such as using the same (UFO).

As shown in FIGS. 69E to 69F above, the performance mode in a predetermined state in which the general electricity is converted to an open state after the end of the time saving state is made different from the performance mode in other states. Performance modes other than the predetermined state include the performance modes from (ta 1) to (na 1) (or (nu 1)) while the remaining hold is being used up when the power station is closed, and (during the time saving state). These are performance modes from (c) to (sa), performance modes in a jackpot state, and performance modes in a normal game state (normal mode) where there is no competition performance. In particular, even in the same right-hand hitting state, by making the effect different from that during the time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the predetermined state in which the general electricity is opened after the end of the time saving state. Note that, unlike this embodiment, when the low probability of a common symbol is set to be greater than 0% (for example, about several percent), the common symbol is converted to an open state by a common symbol hitting during the normal game state (normal mode). However, in this case as well, it may be included in the predetermined state in which the general electricity is converted to the open state.

Above, with reference to FIGS. 69E-F, another example of the performance on the display device 41 after the jackpot of symbol B has been described. However, in the performance after the jackpot of symbols C-F, the timing of the end of the time saving state is before (sa), so the mode changes to the remaining pending consumption mode from before (sa), and the mode of the pending display changes. The appearance of characters, screen backgrounds, etc. will change. If it feels strange to change the mode of pending display or the mode of the character before (sa), it is sufficient to switch only the screen background to that of the remaining pending mode.

In addition, after the jackpot of symbol A, the effect of accumulating special symbol 2 from (e) to (f) will be executed until the end of the second half of the general electricity operation (the end of the general electricity operation), and from (ki) to (sol 1). It is sufficient to omit the effects up to ) and execute the effects after (T1) after the second half opening ends. Moreover, after the jackpot of symbol G, for example, the performances from (e) to (sa) may be repeated until the end of the time saving state.

[Modification of the first embodiment]
A modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 77. In this modification,
In symbols B-F, the number of time reductions is constant at 4 times, but the support status, which is the state related to the aspect of general electricity support, differs depending on the symbol, and as a result, the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations) also differs depending on the symbol. Changes depending on the design.

[Time saving number and specified remaining reservation number corresponding to the pattern related to the modification example]
FIG. 70 is a table showing the support state, the number of time reductions, the specified remaining number of reservations, etc. corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol fluctuation display game regarding the modification. As for symbols A and G, they are the same as those in FIG. 55 except that they are in support state A, so their explanation will be omitted.

In the pattern BF, which is the jackpot type of the special pattern 2 variable display game that started during the normal pattern high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is constant at 4, but The subsequent support states are support states A to E, respectively, and change depending on the symbol.

In addition, for symbols B to D, the specified number of remaining reservations is 4, 6, and 8 depending on the support state, but for symbols E and F, it is random because of support state D and support state E. It is. Therefore,
The total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 8, 10, and 12 for symbols BD, and is random for symbols E and F.

For patterns BD, the continuation rates are 65.6% and 73.9%, respectively, for a small hit probability of 1/8.
7% and 79.9%, and the confirmed mode transition rates are 24.3%, 32.3%, and 38.9%, respectively.
It will be 5%. For symbols E and F, the continuation rate and fixed mode transition rate are random. The continuation rate is the total of special figure 2 reservations that are consumed after the jackpot condition ends (i.e., the special figure 2 reservation after the jackpot condition ends).
Depending on the number of executions of the variable display game), as the total increases in symbols BD, the continuation rate increases. Further, as the specified remaining number of reservations increases in symbols BD, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

In this way, depending on the type of jackpot (special result) (symbols B-F), the operation mode of the general electricity (support state, support mode) after the end of the jackpot state is different, so the type of jackpot (symbol B-F) is different. Depending on F), the continuation rate and the fixed mode transition rate will differ, improving the interest of the game.

[Characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and general electric power operation according to the modified example]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general figure operation regarding the modification. The probability of hitting a general figure, the maximum count number of general electric lines, and the ordinary figure stop time are the same as in FIG. 56.

There are one or more types of winning symbols (hit stop symbols, common symbol winning symbols) in the regular symbol fluctuation display game, or multiple types (four in this case), and there are multiple winning symbols for jackpot symbols E and F, but other jackpot symbols. There is only one type.

The starting memory number of the general figure fluctuation display game (normal figure pending number) is 1, and the game ball does not touch the general figure starting gate 34 even during the winning state (normal power is operating) and during fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game. When it passes, only 1 is stored as the starting memory for the normal figure fluctuation display game. Therefore, in this modification, the process of step A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 34) is not executed, and even when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is changing or in the normal pattern winning state, the number of pending normal patterns is +1 can be updated.

The normal figure fluctuation time, which is the variable time of the normal figure fluctuation display game, is set corresponding to the support state. The ordinary figure stop time (ordinary figure display time) is fixed at 48 msec. As described above, it is preferable that the total of the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop time is smaller than 600 msec.

[Normal power release pattern according to modified example]
FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 show an opening pattern (normal electricity opening pattern) of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (normal electricity) of this modification. The general electricity release pattern indicates the operation mode of the general electricity supply per one general electricity supply. The normal power release pattern selected after the end of the jackpot state differs depending on the jackpot symbols A to G (ie, the type of jackpot). In addition, the number surrounded by the square frame is the value of the control pointer (FIG. 41, etc.) per normal figure.

After the jackpot state with symbols A, B, and G ends, the state related to the aspect of general power support becomes support state A (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal open pattern in support state A,
In the general power operation for one general power supply, the general power supply is opened twice with an interval in between. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and the normal power open times of the first half open and the second half open are both 1300 msec.

Assuming that the firing speed of game balls is 100 balls per minute, it will take 600 msec for general electricity.
Since it is possible to win a game ball each time, in support state A, it is assumed that four game balls will be won in a general power line in one general power line operation. Of course, if the game ball does not successfully hit the power line, the actual number of winning balls will be smaller than the expected number (four in this case). The total open time of 2600 msec for the first half open and the second half open general electricity is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (here, 4), and is provided with a margin.

After the jackpot state with symbol C ends, the state regarding the general power support mode becomes support state B (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the general power opening pattern in the support state B, the general power is opened twice with an interval in between during the general power operation for one general power supply. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power open times of the first half open and the second half open are both 1950 msec.

Assuming that the firing speed of game balls is 100 balls per minute, it will take 600 msec for general electricity.
Since it is possible to win game balls each time, in support state B, it is assumed that 6 game balls will be won in the general power line in one general power line operation. The total open time of 3900 msec for the first half open and the second half open general electricity is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (here, 6), and is provided with a margin.

After the jackpot state with symbol D ends, the state regarding the general power support mode becomes support state C (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the general power opening pattern in the support state C, the general power is opened twice with an interval in between during the general power operation for one general power supply. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power open times of the first half open and the second half open are both 2,600 msec.

Assuming that the firing speed of game balls is 100 balls per minute, it will take 600 msec for general electricity.
Since it is possible to win a game ball each time, in support state C, it is assumed that eight game balls will be won in a general power line in one general power line operation. The total open time of 5200 msec for the first half open and the second half open general electricity is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (8 in this case), and is provided with a margin.

As mentioned above, the period of the open state and the period of the closed state (interval) of the general electricity during or after the end of the jackpot state are determined depending on the symbol that is the type of jackpot (special result). can be changed. Therefore, even if the number of time reductions is the same 4 times, the specified remaining number of reservations and even the actual number of remaining reservations can be changed according to the jackpot symbol, thereby increasing the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game.

After the jackpot state with symbols E and F ends, the state related to the general power support mode becomes support state D and E (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 73(A), in support states D and E, there are four winning symbols in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, symbols 1 to 4 per normal pattern, and each time the normal pattern is hit, the winning symbols are distributed by random numbers ( selected by lottery). The states in which symbols 1 to 4 per regular symbol are selected in support states D and E are respectively supported in support states D1 and E1, support states D2 and E2, and support state D3.
E3 may be called support state D4, E4.

In the normal power operation by one normal pattern, the patterns 1 to 4 per normal pattern (support state D1-D4,
In E1-E4), the normal power line is opened 1 to 4 times with an interval in between, respectively. Regardless of the number of openings according to symbols 1 to 4 (support status D1-D4, E1-E4) per normal pattern, one normal electricity interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and one normal electricity release time is 1500 msec.

In addition, both support state D1 and support state E1, both support state D2 and support state E2, both support state D3 and support state E3, and both support state D4 and support state E4 have the same normal power release pattern. be.

Assuming that the firing speed of game balls is 100 balls per minute, it will take 600 msec for general electricity.
You can win game balls for each game. Therefore, based on the total open time, the number of game balls that enter the general power line in one general power operation is 2 in the support state D1 and E1, 5 in the support state D2 and E2,
It is assumed that there are 7 pieces in support states D3 and E3 and 10 pieces in support states D4 and E4. Of course, if the game balls do not successfully land on the public power line, the actual number of winning balls will be smaller than the expected number.

As shown in FIGS. 73(B) and (C), support state D and support state E differ only in the allocation rate (selection rate) of symbols 1 to 4 per common symbol in the distribution (lottery) based on the winning symbol random number. In support state D corresponding to symbol E, the distribution rates (selection rates) of symbols 1 to 4 per ordinary symbol are 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10%, respectively. In support state E corresponding to symbol F, the distribution rates (selection rates) of symbols 1 to 4 per ordinary symbol are 10%, 20%, 30%, and 40%, respectively. Therefore, in the general power operation per one general circuit, the average value of the number of times the general power is opened is larger in support state E (average value = 3 times) than in support state D (average value = 2 times). .

In this way, when the jackpot (special result) is of a predetermined type (symbols E, F), the operation mode of the general power after the jackpot state is changed to multiple operation modes (support state D1 -D4,E
1-E4) will be decided by a lottery. Therefore, if the jackpot is of a predetermined type (symbols E, F), there is no prescribed number of remaining reserves, and the player cannot predict the actual number of remaining reserves, The game becomes more interesting because the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

[Timing chart according to modified example]
FIGS. 74 to 76 show the game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern hit probability), normal pattern state, normal power state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern winning probability), normal pattern probability (probability of normal pattern winning), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special pattern 2 pending number, special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern winning probability), normal pattern probability (probability of normal pattern hit), normal pattern state, normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special pattern 2 reservation number, special pattern fluctuation display game FIG. Note that time elapses as you go to the right in the timing chart. Fig. 74 shows the case where the support state A becomes after the jackpot with the symbol B, Fig. 75 shows the case where the support state C becomes the state after the jackpot with the symbol D, and Fig. 76 shows the case where the support state becomes the state after the jackpot with the symbol E (or the symbol F). A case where support state D (or support state E) is reached will be illustrated.

In addition, FIGS. 74 to 76 show the passing of a game ball through the general figure starting gate 34 (general figure gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (general line) (starting). Mouth 2
Detection of switch 37a) is also shown as a pulse.

In FIGS. 74 to 76, the process is the same as in FIGS. 57 to 59 until the first normal power operation and the first special symbol 2 variable display game accompanying it are started.

In FIG. 74, after the jackpot with symbol B, the general power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in support state A is executed three times, and the general power is released six times in total. As mentioned above, the game control device 100 calculates the variation time (execution time) and stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the number of times the special figure 2 fluctuates (the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed) from the end of the jackpot state. ). In the support state A, the fourth special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the number of time reductions is executed in accordance with the third general power operation (normal figure hit state). In addition, the stoppage after the end of the common map hit state corresponds to the general power remaining ball processing time and the general map ending time.

The number of special map 2 reservations increases when the general power line is open (open state), and the number of special map 2 reservations increases when the general power line is closed (closed state).
There is a tendency for it to decrease as the reservations are exhausted.

In addition, so that 4 special chart 2 reservations can be accumulated during the time saving state and the third regular power operation, the fluctuation time of the fourth special chart 2 fluctuation display game will be the same as the first to third special chart 2 fluctuations. It is set to be longer than the variable time of the display game and longer than one normal power open time (first half open time or second half open time).

In FIG. 74, the fourth special symbol 2 variable display game is started at the end of the second half open in the second general power operation, but after the end of this second half open and the third general power operation starts. You may end the fourth special figure 2 variable display game at any time as long as it is before. In addition, the fourth special map 2 variable display game is stopped at the end of the first half opening in the third general power operation, but if it is after the opening of the first half and before the start of the second half opening, the fourth You can end the special figure 2 variable display game at any time.

Then, after the end of the third regular power operation started by the winning of a regular symbol during the time saving state, the fifth special symbol 2 variable display game is controlled to be started. The variation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 variable display games executed by remaining reservation after the end of the time saving state may be less than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games during the time saving state. This allows you to quickly clear up any remaining reservations. On the contrary, the variation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 variation display games is made longer than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games during the time saving state, and the corresponding effect is performed slowly. You can also do that. In addition, in the symbol B, the specified remaining number of reservations is 4, which occurred during the time saving state.

In FIG. 75, after the jackpot with symbol D, the general power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in support state C is executed twice, and the general power is released four times in total. In support state C, 1
In conjunction with the opening of the second half of the first general electricity operation (the first half opening) and the opening of the second half of the second general electricity operation (the second half opening), four special symbols 2 variable display games corresponding to the number of time reductions will be played. is controlled so that it is executed.

In addition, so that 4 special chart 2 reservations can be accumulated during the time saving state and during the opening of the first half of the second general power operation, the variable time of the 4th special chart 2 variable display game is the same as the 1st to 3rd special charts. It is set to be longer than the variable time of the 2-variable display game and longer than one normal power switch-off time (in FIG. 75, it is set to about twice the normal power switch-off time). In addition, in FIG. 75, the fourth special figure 2 variation display game is stopped at the end of the first half opening in the second general power operation, but the fifth special figure 2 variation display game is stopped after the second half opening. If a display game is to be executed, it may be slightly shifted.

The number of special map 2 reservations increases when the general power line is open (open state), and the number of special map 2 reservations increases when the general power line is closed (closed state).
There is a tendency for it to decrease as the reservations are exhausted.

Then, during the interval after the end of the second first half opening, the fifth to seventh special figure 2 variable display games are controlled to be started. After that, the second half opening of the second general power operation started by hitting a common map during the time saving state is performed after the time saving state ends, and the special chart 2 variable display game is executed while increasing the special chart 2 reservation as the remaining reservation. . If you properly adjust the fluctuation time of the 5th and subsequent special figure 2 variable display games that are executed by the remaining reservations after the end of the time saving state, 5 to 12 The second special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. In this way, for symbol D, the specified remaining number of reserved symbols is 8.

In addition, since the remaining reserve can be used up quickly, the fluctuation time of the 5th to 12th special figure 2 variable display games may be less than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games during the time saving state. On the contrary, 5~
The variable time of the 12th special figure 2 variable display game may be made longer than the variable time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games during the time saving state, so that the performance can be performed slowly.

In addition, as in the case of symbol D, for symbol C, the fluctuation time (execution time) and stop time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are changed to the number of executions, corresponding to the operation mode of the general electric power station (support state B). The remaining number of reservations can be changed to 6 depending on the situation. For example, for symbol C, by reducing the number of special symbol 2 variable display games that are started during the regular power interval after the end of time saving compared to symbol D, the number of remaining reservations becomes 6.

As described above, the pattern of the variable time (execution time) and stop time according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is set according to the operating mode (support state A to C) of the general electricity. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations can be changed depending on the operation mode of the power station (support status AC).

In FIG. 76, after the jackpot with symbol E or symbol F, in support state D or support state E,
The general electricity operation (first half opening + interval + second half opening +...) according to the symbol per general pattern is repeated at random, and the general electricity is released several times in total. In the support state D or the support state E, it is difficult to control so that the special chart 2 variable display game is executed four times corresponding to the number of time reductions in accordance with the random opening of the general electricity.

However, the number of special map 2 reservations increases while the general electricity line is open (open state), and during the general electricity interval (
In the closed state), the number tends to decrease due to the consumption of special drawing 2 reservations.

In addition, so that 4 special figure 2 reservations can be accumulated during the time saving state, the variation time of the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games, and It is set longer than the normal power release time for one time. The remaining number of reservations is the number of symbols 1 to 4 per normal pattern (support status D1-D4, E1-E4
) is determined by the mode of normal electricity operation corresponding to As shown in Figure 76, when a regular symbol is won with symbol 4 per regular symbol at the end of the 4th special symbol 2 fluctuation display game, the remaining number of reservations is also large because the total open time of the regular symbol is large. However, when the symbol 1 per ordinary symbol becomes a symbol per ordinary symbol, the total open time of the ordinary electricity is small, so the remaining number of reservations is also small.

In addition, since the remaining reservation can be used up quickly, the fluctuation time of the 5th and subsequent special figure 2 variable display games after the end of the time saving state is less than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games during the time saving state. good. Conversely, the variation time of the 5th and subsequent special figure 2 variable display games may be made longer than the variable time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games during the time-saving state, so that the effect can be performed slowly. .

As a countermeasure against the above-mentioned previous deviation in this modification, in order to match the specified remaining number of reservations with the actual number of remaining reservations, after the jackpot of symbols BD, during the fourth special symbol 2 fluctuation display game. An example of this is that the fifth special map 2 variable display game is not executed until the regular electricity release (first half release) that started in 2008 is completed. As a countermeasure against the above-mentioned later deviation, in order to match the specified remaining number of reservations and the actual number of remaining reservations, after the jackpot of symbols B-D, the number of regular symbols during the fourth special symbol 2 variable display game will be changed. An example of this is to perform the second half opening of the general power line after the special figure 2 variable display game has started a predetermined number of times (for example, 0 times for symbol B and 2 times for symbol D). Note that after the jackpot of symbols E and F, the remaining number of reservations cannot be specified and is random, so there is no need to take measures against the deviation. Conversely, since there is no need to take measures against misalignment, patterns E and F are also
Similarly, a configuration in which four symbols are provided per ordinary symbol is also possible.

Above, we have explained what happens after the jackpot state ends for each symbol, but other than the 4th special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state (1st to 3rd and 5th and subsequent special figure 2 variable display games) The variation time may be made the same regardless of the symbols BF to simplify control and reduce the storage capacity used in the ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.

[An example of screen transition according to the modified example]
FIGS. 77A and 77B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the modification of the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 corresponds to FIG. 75 (after the jackpot of symbol D).

After the same effect as shown in (a) to (e) in Figure 69 is performed, the open and closed states of the general electricity line are repeated during the time saving state, but as shown in (o1), the general electricity line is closed and closed. In this state (while the public power grid is closed), the number of special map 2 reservations decreases and the number of special map 2 reservations does not reach 4 easily.

After that, in (f), when the time saving state ends, the number of reserved special drawings 2 reaches 4, and then the same effects as in (k) and (h) of FIG. 69 are performed.

Next, in (Q1) to (Q4), unlike from (Q) to (SA) in FIG. The character 557 is not a sub-character who supports the character 557, but fights one-on-one against enemy characters 554 one after another as a main character. Note that after (Q4), the same effect as after (T) in FIG. 69 is performed, and here, the hold display 533e-
A character such as 533i is used as a sub-character 558 that supports the ally character 557.

In addition, after the time saving state ends, the number of special map 2 holds will decrease in the closed state (during public electricity) from (ku) to (ku 2), and when the regular electricity is open from (ku 3) to (ku 4). In the state (normal electricity is open), the number of special map 2 reservations increases. In the closed state of the general electricity grid, there is not much benefit to hitting the right hand even in the state of hitting the right hand, and the right-hand hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous small form. Therefore, the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner.

The first embodiment and its modified examples have been described above, but the specific gaming state may be not only a time saving state but also a probability variable state (excluding a latent probability variable state). In addition, 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1 + 2 type machine)
In addition, the first embodiment and its modifications may be simply applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called DigiPachi) having a specific gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state). For one type of gaming machine that has a variable probability state, especially for machines with a high jackpot probability even with a low probability of a special figure after the variable probability state ends (so-called sweet digital, Choipachi), a jackpot can be expected in the remaining number of reservations, so the first Applying the embodiment and its modifications will have great effects.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) that can execute a game (special figure variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electricity) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a variable probability state). The game control means (for example, the game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) generated by winning a prize in the variable winning device. When a game results in a special result (for example, a small hit or a jackpot, including a jackpot due to a V-winning after a small win) in a specific gaming state, the gaming value (for example, the number of shortened times or the number of variable probability) that is given to the player is This is different from the gaming value given to the player if the game has a special result after the end of the state.

In such a gaming machine 10, there is a difference in the gaming value given by the special result of the game during the specific gaming state and after the specific gaming state ends. The game becomes more interesting as the player changes the number of times the game is executed.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) that can execute a game (a regular figure fluctuation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general power line) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal pattern variable display game) is a specific result (normal pattern winning). Equipped with The game control means is capable of converting the variable prize winning device into an open state multiple times by deriving a single specific result (a hit on a regular map), and the probability that the game will result in a specific result (a win on a regular map) is high. The variable prize winning device can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state where the probability is high and the low probability state where the probability is low.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will have a specific result (normal pattern hit) is low, the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general wire) can be changed to an open state, and the variable winning device can be changed to an open state. Since it is possible to accumulate starting memories (for example, special drawing 2 pending) generated by winning a prize in the device, it is possible to please the player and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and a performance control means (for example, a performance control device 300) capable of executing a performance related to the game. Be prepared. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electricity) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a variable probability state). The game control means is capable of generating a predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is converted to an open state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of winning) even after the end of the specific game state, and the production control means
To make a performance mode in a predetermined state different from a performance mode in a state other than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific gaming state, a predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is converted to an open state similarly to the specific gaming state can be distinguished from the specific gaming state by the appearance of the performance. Further, by making the performance mode unique to a predetermined state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable prize winning device, the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending), which is the right to execute the game (special figure variable display game), is not consumed.
The starting memory can be accumulated by winning a prize in the variable winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) for a long time in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and runs the game for a short time in response to the closed state of the variable winning device. It can be executed with Therefore, the open state of the variable prize winning device (for example, first half open) during a specific gaming state
, store a large amount of starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending), use up a large amount of starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) in the subsequent closed state (for example, interval), and then return to the open state (for example, second half open) after the end of the specific game state. ), you can save a lot of starting memory (for example, special map 2 pending). For this reason, the number of starting memories that will be consumed after the end of a specific game state (the number of remaining reservations) is set to the upper limit of the number of starting memories (for example, 4).
Can be more than that. Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable winning device for a longer time than the time in which the variable winning device is in the open state. Therefore,
Even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (fluctuating time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed, and the actual number of remaining reservations will not be more or less than the specified number of remaining reservations. Match.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variable display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period when the variable prize winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (fluctuating time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed and the actual number of remaining reservations exceeds the specified number of remaining reservations. Match perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game (special figure fluctuation display game) for a predetermined number of times (
For example, the specific game state is controlled to end when the game is executed (eg, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times). After the specific gaming state ends, the number of times the game is executed based on the start memory generated by winning the variable winning device (the prescribed number of remaining reservations from 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, the time saving number or the fixed number of variable winnings). ). Therefore, if a predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the remaining number of reservations will also be randomly and variable and set by lottery, and the player will be able to experience joy and sorrow depending on the remaining number of reservations, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls whether the game (special figure fluctuation display game) has a special result (
A predetermined number of times (for example, a time-saving number or a fixed variable number of times) can be set as a game value given to a player when a small hit or a jackpot is achieved, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes randomly, improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines the number of times the game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (specified remaining pending number), and the predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of fixed variable times). Let the sum of the numbers be constant (for example, 10). Therefore, the remaining number of reservations can be made variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific gaming state the same. If the same production mode is executed during the specific gaming state and after the end of the specific gaming state while this fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are being executed, the player will be able to decide whether he is in the specific gaming state or after the end of the specific gaming state. It becomes difficult to tell whether the player is playing the game or not, and it becomes surprising when a large game value is obtained by winning the remaining reservation after the end of a specific game state, which improves the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variable display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variable display game). The game control means is capable of executing the first game based on the starting memory generated by the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning hole 36), and is capable of executing the first game by winning the game ball into the variable winning device. A second game can be executed based on the starting memory that occurs. The second game (Special figure 2 variable display game) is the first game (Special figure 1
In addition, when the first game is executed in a specific game state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced, and the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state.
is executed, the start of the second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is not significantly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (normal figure fluctuation display game) and a second game (
(Special figure fluctuation display game) included. The game control means can execute the first game based on the passing of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal figure starting gate 34), and can execute the first game by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric wire). The second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated starting memory. In the specific game state, even if a game ball passes through a predetermined area (normal pattern starting gate 34) during the execution of the first game and during the winning state generated by the specific result of the first game, the first A starting memory (general memory) that becomes the right to execute the game is not generated.

Therefore, the first game (general figure fluctuation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (general figure starting gate 34) during the stop display, the general figure fluctuation display game starts. do. In this way, the starting memory (general figure memory) of the first game (general figure fluctuation display game)
Since this is not substantially accumulated, the first game (general figure fluctuation display game) is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device due to a hit in the first game (regular figure variable display game) and the second game (special figure variable display game) are likely to be linked without any deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific gaming state when the open state of the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, ordinary power line) ends a specified number of times (for example, twice) in the specific gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of winnings in the variable winning device is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the time saving number or the fixed variable number of times) and the specific gaming state is extended by stopping the winnings. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the number of open states of the variable prize winning device from increasing excessively due to a win in the first game (normal pattern variable display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the execution time (variation time) of the game based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) has been executed since the end of the special game state. Therefore,
The game (special figure variable display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and when the variable winning device is open, the start memory (for example, special figure variable display game) that becomes the right to execute the game (special figure variable display game) 2) can be saved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure fluctuation display game) is a special result (for example, a small hit or a jackpot, including a jackpot due to a V prize after a small hit), , it is possible to generate special gaming conditions (for example, jackpot conditions) that are advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is a variable prize winning device that can be converted into an open state and a closed state, and is easier to convert to the open state in a specific gaming state (for example, time saving state or variable probability state) after the special gaming state ( It is equipped with a normal variable prize winning device 37 (general electricity). The variable winning device operates differently (support state, support mode) after the special game state ends depending on the type of special result (symbol).

Therefore, depending on the type of special result (symbol), the number of remaining reservations, which is the number of executions of the game after a specific gaming state (special symbol fluctuation display game), and the continuation rate of the specific gaming state, etc.
It changes depending on. For this reason, players began to pay attention to the types of special results (symbols).
The interest in playing games also improves.

In a modification of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means that can execute a game (special figure variable display game). The game control means sets a game execution time and a game stop time according to the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends. A pattern of execution time and stop time according to the number of times the game is executed is set according to the operation mode (support status AC) of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, depending on the type of special result (symbol) and the operation mode of the variable winning device (support status A-C), the game (special figure variable display game) after the end of the specific gaming state
The number of remaining reservations, which is the number of execution times, can be changed.

In a modification of the first embodiment, when the special result is of a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), the game control means controls the operation mode of the variable prize winning device after the end of the special game state into a plurality of operations. It will be decided by lottery based on the appearance (lottery of symbols per common pattern). Therefore, if the special result is of a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), there is no stipulated remaining number of reservations, and the player cannot predict the actual number of remaining reservations. The game becomes more interesting because the player can play the game with a sense of expectation regarding the numbers.

In a modification of the first embodiment, the game control means determines the period of the open state and the period of the closed state of the variable prize winning device during or after the specific gaming state, depending on the type of special result (symbols BD).
It can be changed depending on. Therefore, the remaining number of reservations can be changed depending on the type of special result (symbols BD) and furthermore the operation mode of the general electric power station (support state AC).

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. Note that the configuration other than those described below may be the same as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. Second
The embodiment relates to a display mode of a hold display (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory during or after the time saving state (general power support state, electricity support state) as a specific game state.

[Example of screen transition from time saving state to after time saving state]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the second start memory from the time saving state to after the time saving state will be described.

FIG. 78 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state. Moreover, FIG. 79 is an example (middle part) of a screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state, and FIG. 80 is an example (second half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state.

(A) of FIG. 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first starting memory that occurred before the jackpot after the time has been shortened after the jackpot ends. be.

At the center of the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided. In the variable display area 610, the left area 6
The first decoration pattern A (identification information, pattern, special decoration pattern) is displayed in 10A, the first decoration pattern B is displayed in the right area 610B, and the first decoration pattern C is displayed in the middle area 610C in large size. and is displayed in a fluctuating manner (“↓↓↓”).

At the upper right corner of the display screen, a variable display area 615 is provided in which a variable display game is executed using decorative special symbols (small symbols). The small symbols in the variable display area 615 are displayed in a variable manner (“↓↓↓”) in a normal variable manner. The results of the variable display in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are contents that match each other. Further, when the variable display game is being executed, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the variable display area 6
Instead of displaying the 10 decorative first symbols A to C, only the small symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in the variable display area 615 in the upper right corner. In this way, during a specific gaming state such as a time saving state, the variable display area 610
By not displaying the variable display related to the special figure 1 variable display game with the first symbols A to C, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main game in the normal gaming state and the main figure in the specific game state It becomes easier for the player to distinguish this from the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a game, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, when the special symbol 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the immediately preceding stop symbol, that is, the jackpot symbol, may remain displayed on the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610. The default (initial state) pattern (for example, “123
”) etc. may be displayed on standby.

Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 and a special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 are provided. Special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and special figure 2 reserved number display section 660
, a number "1" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and a number "0" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 are displayed.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, there is a starting memory display area (specific display section, specific display area).
As shown in FIG.
and is provided.

The hold extinguishing area 640 contains a hold display (starting memory display, special figure 1 holding) corresponding to the first starting memory (special figure 1 holding) related to the variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) that is being executed (being consumed). A pending display 633w during fluctuation is displayed as a pending display, special symbol fluctuation pending display, special symbol consumption pending display). That is, there are two first starting memories that occurred before the jackpot, and the pending display corresponding to the starting memory that occurred earlier (older starting memory) among the two first starting memories is the pending display 6 during fluctuation.
It corresponds to 33w.

In addition, the starting memory that occurred later among the two first starting memories (new starting memory) is on standby without being digested, and the number indicating the number of special drawings 1 on the special drawing 1 holding number display section 650 is the same as the above-mentioned number. It becomes "1". Note that the pending pending display 633w during fluctuation corresponding to the first start memory and the pending expiration area 640, which is the area where the pending display 633w during fluctuation is displayed, may be hidden in the time saving state.

In the second hold display section 630b, a hold display (starting memory display, special figure 2 hold display, standby hold display) corresponding to the generated second starting memory (special figure 2 hold) is displayed. For example, in (A) of FIG. 78, where the time saving state has just entered the state immediately after the end of the jackpot, the second starting memory has not yet occurred, and no pending display corresponding to the second starting memory is displayed (0 pieces). Further, the starting memory of the main variable display game in a specific game state such as a time saving state is a second starting memory. In addition,
Similarly to the first embodiment, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game depending on the gaming state and the like.

Note that in the starting memory display area at the bottom of the display screen, the first pending display section 630a in which a pending display corresponding to the first starting memory is displayed is hidden, and the first pending display section 630a that corresponds to the first starting memory that is on standby is hidden. The hold display is not displayed during the time saving state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the production control device 300 displays the first pending display section 63 instead of the second pending display section 630b.
0a can be displayed at the bottom of the display screen (specific display section). That is, the starting memory of the main variable display game in the normal gaming state is the first starting memory.

Moreover, the production control device 300 may display a right-handed display (a right-handed hit instruction image) from the time it becomes the time saving state until the second start memory occurs. Furthermore, even after the second start memory occurs, the right-handed hitting display may be continued to be displayed when the player is hitting right-handed. Note that since the player is playing a right-handed game during the jackpot game (special game), the performance control device 300 may not display the right-handed game unless the player plays a left-handed game.

FIG. 78(b) shows the display device 41 when a plurality of second starting memories occur after the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as shown in FIG. 78(a) based on the first starting memory. This is the display screen.

A second starting memory is generated when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity). At that time, for example, if three second start memories occur as shown in FIG. At the same time, pending displays 633x, 633y, and 633z are displayed on the second pending display section 630b.

The hold displays 633x, 633y, and 633z displayed on the second hold display section 630b are
It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽") that is different from the display mode (for example, "〇") of the hold display 633w corresponding to the start memory. In addition, the pending display and shape of the first start memory ("〇" and "
▽" etc.), colors, patterns, sizes, etc. may be made different as a predetermined display mode. Therefore, since the hold display corresponding to the first starting memory and the hold display corresponding to the second starting memory are displayed in different display modes, the player can determine which starting memory the hold display corresponds to. It becomes easier to do.

In addition, at the bottom of the hold displays 633x, 633y, and 633z, a rectangular square frame (for example, "□
”) is displayed. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the pedestal in the square frame, the hold display 6
It is possible to recognize that 33x, 633y, and 633z are special pending displays, and the sense of anticipation can be increased. The special hold display is a hold display corresponding to the first remaining hold, which will be described later, and when the variable display game is executed based on the special hold display, the performance is switched to a predetermined performance mode. In addition, in FIG. 78(b) and the diagrams to be described later, an explanation "new" is shown above the pending display so that it can be seen that this is a newly generated pending display, but the display device 41 The character "new" may be actually displayed on the display screen to inform the player that a new pending display has occurred.

(C) of FIG. 78 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 1 variable display game that was being executed in (A) and (B) of FIG. 78 stops changing.

For example, as shown in FIG.
''), the next variable display game will be executed in accordance with the standby hold (start memory). Further, in (c) of FIG. 78, a second start memory is newly generated, and a hold display 633 is displayed on the second hold display section 630b. The number indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations on the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 is "4". In the following explanation, it is assumed that the stop results of the variable display game are all losses.

In addition, if the stop result of the variable display game is a jackpot or a small hit, the following explanation will include effects associated with the jackpot or small win (fanfare effects, effects that instruct how to play to aim for a V-win, etc.) It is assumed that the transition can be made to . In addition, the variable time value of the variable display game in the case of a performance accompanying a jackpot or small win is set longer than the variable time value in the case of a loss,
The production control device 300 can execute a dedicated production as the production. Further, the variable time value in the case of a jackpot or a miss may be a fixed value (fixed variable time value).

Moreover, since the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed first before the second starting memory occurs, it becomes easier to accumulate the second starting memory during the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, when switching to a predetermined performance mode (predetermined performance stage), it becomes easier for the player to visually confirm a series of performances (continuous performance) based on multiple second start memories without interruption, and It can increase interest. Furthermore, the production control device 300 executes the special figure 1 variable display game in the time saving state with a shortened variation (fixed variable time value). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game can be stopped from changing without delay, the special figure 2 variable display game can be started immediately, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game stops changing, if there is a second starting memory on standby, the square frame of the pending extinguishing area 640 changes, and a dedicated area for extinguishing the second starting memory changes. Switch to a frame (for example, a "convex pedestal"). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the next variable display game is a special figure 2 variable display game, and the sense of anticipation can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in (c) of FIG.
Although 0a is not displayed, the first suspension display section 630a may be displayed together with the second suspension display section 630b to display a suspension display corresponding to the first start memory. In addition, the display mode (frame) of the pending extinguishing area 640 is the display mode for the pending display of the first starting memory (square frame, e.g. "□") and the display mode for the pending display of the second starting memory (a dedicated frame). , for example, a "convex pedestal"), and can be displayed in a common display mode, for example, a display mode for holding the second starting memory (a dedicated frame, for example, a "convex pedestal"). It's okay.

(E) of FIG. 78 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second starting memory after the special figure 1 variable display game. Game control device 100
can execute the special figure 2 variable display game by giving priority to the second starting memory over the first starting memory which is on standby (stored) (special figure 2 priority variation).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, as shown in FIG. 78(e), the variable display area 6
The ten decorative first symbols A to C and the small symbols in the variable display area 615 are displayed in a variable manner (“↓↓↓”). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the pending displays 633x, 633y, 633z, and 633 displayed in the second pending display section 630b move one by one to the left (pending shift), and the One hold display 633x at the left end of the second hold display section 630b moves to the hold extinguishment area 640, and a floating hold display 633x is displayed on the convex base of the hold extinguishment area 640.

In addition, the production control device 300, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the time saving state,
The performance can be switched to a performance mode (time saving mode, time saving stage) corresponding to the time saving state. In addition, when the time-saving state is entered or when the first variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed during the time-saving state ((a) in FIG. 78), the production mode corresponding to the time-saving state is activated. You may change the performance.

In addition, in (E) of FIG. 78, a new reservation display 633a is generated, and the special figure 2 reservation number display section 6
The number indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 of 60 is "4".

In the pending pending display 633x of the pending expiration area 640, for example, characters such as "4 remaining" that inform the player of the remaining number of times of a predetermined performance mode are displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 78(e), a number indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed integrally with the pending change display 633x, and "remaining" may be displayed at the top of the pending change display 633x. According to this display mode, it is possible to switch only the number indicating the remaining number of times according to the pending shift, so it becomes easy to understand which number is displayed corresponding to which floating pending display, and it is possible to switch between To make it easier for a player to accurately grasp the remaining number of times in the performance mode.

In addition, when displaying the pending consumption area 640 in the common display mode, when the pending display of the first start memory is displayed in the pending consumption area 640, characters informing the remaining number of times, such as "4 remaining", are not displayed. You can also do this. Furthermore, when the hold display of the first starting memory is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640, the characters notifying the remaining number of times are displayed in an inconspicuous display format such as semi-transparent or gray, so that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to them. It may be displayed as follows. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the production control device 300 may hide characters informing the remaining number of times, such as "4 remaining", and the remaining number of times will not be updated. can also be canceled. In addition, special map 1
The variable display game can be executed based on the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) generated before the jackpot game, or based on the first starting memory generated after the jackpot game.

Further, for example, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions is set to one time, and the pending display 633
When the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to x stops changing, the time saving state ends (time saving ends),
The gaming state shifts to the transition state. Then, the second start memory (special map 2 pending) that occurred (memorized) during the time saving state (during time saving) but was not cleared during the time saving will be cleared as a remaining reservation in the transition state after the time saving ends. be done. In (e) of FIG. 78, the reservation displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are reservation displays 633y, 633x, 633, and 633a. Therefore, in the transition state, while the jackpot probability and normal winning probability are the same as in the normal gaming state, it becomes an advantageous state in which it is easy to generate a small hit with a small winning probability (for example, 1/8) by using up the remaining reservation. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the transition state may be included in the normal gaming state in terms of probability, or may be treated separately from the normal gaming state since it is an advantageous state. In addition, the player can pass V during the small hit (
A jackpot can be generated by passing the game ball to the V winning hole (V winning) (1 type 2
seed mixer).

Here, in the first embodiment, the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold) that is consumed after the end of the time reduction is called the remaining hold, but in the second embodiment, for example, it occurs during the time reduction and after the end of the time reduction. The special map 2 hold that is consumed is called the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold, remaining hold that occurs during time reduction), and the special draw 2 hold that occurs after the end of time reduction is called excessive hold (second remaining hold, excessive remaining hold). You can call me.

In addition, for example, in the second embodiment, the first predetermined number of the special drawing 2 reservations that occur during the time reduction and are consumed after the end of the time reduction is called the predetermined remaining reservation (first remaining reservation), and after the predetermined remaining reservation, The special figure 2 reservation to be consumed may be called excessive reservation (second remaining reservation).

After execution of the variable display game related to predetermined remaining reservation, when execution of the variable display game related to excessive reservation is started, the performance is switched from a predetermined performance mode (predetermined performance stage) to another performance mode. Therefore, in other words, the predetermined remaining hold is the remaining hold when a variable display game is executed during a predetermined presentation mode, and the excessive hold is the remaining hold when a variable display game is executed during another presentation mode. Become.

For example, in (e) of FIG. 78, a pending display 63 that occurs during time saving and is cleared after time saving ends.
3y, 633x, 633, and 633a are the reservation displays corresponding to the predetermined remaining reservations (first remaining reservations, remaining reservations occurring during time reduction). In addition, in this case, the predetermined remaining balance (first remaining pending, remaining remaining pending during time reduction)
The number is, for example, four.

(O) in FIG. 78 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first first remaining reservation after the time reduction ends.

The performance control device 300 can switch the performance from the time saving mode to a predetermined performance mode, for example, a time saving generation remaining reservation extinguishing mode in a transition state, when the variable display game based on the first remaining reservation is started.

The mode for extinguishing remaining reservations that occur during time reduction is a mode for extinguishing the first remaining reservation (predetermined remaining reservation, residual reservation that occurs during time reduction) that occurs during time reduction and is cleared after the end of time reduction.

When a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the first remaining holds are exhausted in the time saving mode, the excess holdings are used to clear the subsequent holds (excessive holdings, second remaining holdings, excessive remaining holdings). mode(
The performance shifts to the first performance).

Furthermore, as a mode consisting of the time saving mode and the excess reservation mode, there is a transition mode of the remaining reservation consumption mode.

For example, the performance in the time saving mode, which is a predetermined performance mode, can be executed as a series of performances in which the story, characters, etc., are related to the performance in the time saving mode that is executed immediately before. Therefore, the scenario is developed (displayed, played) over a plurality of variable display games that are executed based on the second reserved special symbol that is used up during the time reduction and the first remaining reservation that is used up after the time reduction ends. Since the player can visually recognize the effects as a series of effects and enjoy more complex effects with a deeper story, it is possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, as mentioned above, the performance modes in advantageous states such as the transition state and the specific game state (time saving mode, remaining reservation consumption mode that occurs during time reduction in the remaining reservation consumption mode) can be made into the same production mode and a common production mode without separating them. good.

In addition, for example, after the time saving ends, the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric wire) may be opened due to the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, a further win in the general pattern variable display game (if the low probability of the normal pattern is greater than 0%), etc. 37b is opened and the game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining hold is generated, and a hold display 633b corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed as shown in (A) of FIG. (displayed as “new”). In addition, the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is opened even after the time reduction ends is, for example, a case where the normal variable winning device 37 is open at the time of the time reduction and continues to be open for a while even after the time reduction ends, or when the first implementation This is the case when the second half of the form is opened. The hold display 633b corresponding to the second remaining hold indicates that a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first
This is the excess reserve that is to be consumed in the excess reserve consumption mode that is entered after the remaining reserve has been exhausted.

At the bottom of the hold display 633z, 633, 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold, a rectangular square frame (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed, while the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold is displayed.
A rectangular square frame serving as a pedestal is not displayed at the bottom of 3b. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish the hold display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining hold, making it easier for the player to recognize to what extent the performance in the time-saving generated remaining hold extinguishment mode is performed as a predetermined performance mode. can. Further, the word "Last" may be displayed on the pedestal of the hold display 633a so that the hold display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining hold can be easily distinguished.

Further, the characters (remaining number of modes) displayed on the changing pending display 633y of the pending consumption area 640 and informing the player of the remaining number of times of the predetermined production mode (remaining number of modes) are switched to, for example, "3 remaining". Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize how many times the performance in the time saving generation remaining suspension extinguishment mode will be performed as the predetermined performance mode.

78(a) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second first remaining reservation after the time saving ends.

After the hold shift, when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second starting memory corresponding to the second first remaining hold, that is, the changing hold display 633z, the changing hold in the hold extinguishing area 640 The remaining number of modes displayed on the display 633z is switched to, for example, "2 remaining". Furthermore, when the game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining hold is generated, and a hold display 633c corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). In addition, in the remaining hold consumption mode after the end of the time reduction (remaining hold consumption mode or excessive hold consumption mode during time reduction), the hold shift performance of the consumption hold (fluctuating hold display) and the waiting hold may be omitted. .

(B) in FIG. 79 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reservation after the time saving ends.

After the hold shift, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second starting memory corresponding to the third first remaining hold, that is, the fluctuating hold display 633, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of modes displayed in the pending change display 633 of the processing area 640 is switched to, for example, "1 remaining mode." Further, the hold display 633d corresponding to the new second remaining hold is displayed on the second hold display section 63.
0b (displayed as "new").

(h) of FIG. 79 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation after the end of the time reduction.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the same way as in FIG. For example, the remaining number of modes displayed in the pending change display 633a of the consumption area 640 is "0 remaining".
Switch to .

The second reservation display section 630b includes reservation displays 633b, 633 corresponding to the three second remaining reservations.
c, 633d are displayed. The number indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 on the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 is “
3".

In (ke) of FIG. 79, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the second start memory (special figure 2 pending) occurs after (k) in FIG. 79.

When the game ball enters the normal variable prize winning device 37, the second remaining hold in the second starting memory is generated, and the holding display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). Further, the number indicating the number of special drawings 2 on hold in the special drawings 2 holding number display section 660 is "4". Then, the number of first remaining reservations on standby becomes 0, and the number of second remaining reservations becomes 4.

In () of FIG. 79, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the screen transitions to the result screen 670 after (ke) in FIG. 79.

The special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, that is, the last (latest) first remaining reservation, and in the second half of the fluctuation, the production control device 300 displays the display screen of the display device 41. A result screen 670 showing game results for a predetermined period can be displayed (result display)
. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth 1st remaining reservation is being executed, and (
The production mode in this) continues to be the production remaining pending consumption mode during the time reduction. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of displaying the result, the time saving mode may end, and the mode may transition to an excessive pending consumption mode, which is another performance mode.

In this way, the performance control device 300 displays the result in the middle of execution of the variable display game based on the latest first remaining reservation when all the variable display games in the time saving mode and the remaining reservation extinguishment mode during the time reduction mode result in failures. It can be performed.

The result screen 670 shows the number of game balls acquired in the most recent (latest) jackpot, the number of game balls obtained in a series of jackpots after the first hit (the first regular jackpot), the number of consecutive jackpots, and the details of the jackpot. The details (normal jackpot, jackpot due to V winning during time saving or transition state, performance contents when jackpot occurs), etc. can be displayed. The series of jackpots includes, for example, all jackpots that occur while the right-hand hit state continues.

Further, the production control device 300 hides the variable display area 610, the second pending display section 630b, and the pending consumption area 640 while displaying the results. Therefore, the result screen 670 can be displayed in a large size on the display screen, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the result screen 670.
It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, the variable display area 615, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650, the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660
The display is maintained, and the player can check the variable symbols, the number of special drawings 1 pending, and the number of special drawings 2 pending.

Note that the result screen 670 may be displayed at the timing ((a) in FIG. 79) when the variable display game based on the first (initial) second remaining balance is started. Also, the second
If there is no remaining pending, the result screen 670 may be hidden at the timing when the variable display game based on the last first remaining pending stops changing (immediately after ( ) in FIG. 79).

(Sa) of FIG. 79 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while the result is being displayed.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the first second remaining reservation, the performance changes from a predetermined production mode (remaining reservation consumption mode that occurs during time reduction) to another production mode, excessive reservation consumption mode. Can be switched. Furthermore, even if the performance is switched to the excessive hold consumption mode, the display device 41
The result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen. Therefore, the result screen 67
The player can secure sufficient time to check the game results displayed on the screen.

Further, by executing the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reserve, the number indicating the number of special figure 2 reserves on the special figure 2 reserve number display section 660 becomes "3".

Note that the state in which the result screen 670 is displayed in the excessive pending consumption mode may be referred to as a result mode.

(b) of FIG. 79 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining balance stops changing.

For example, when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops changing, the result mode ends, and as shown in (b) of FIG. 79, the display changes from the result screen 670, and the variable display The game stops changing when a winning symbol (for example, "267") is reached. That is, the production control device 300, until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation is executed once,
A result screen 670 can be displayed. The display switching timing (screen transition trigger) from the result screen 670 is based on the starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area, starting opening 1).
) or the timing when the game ball wins or passes through the normal symbol starting gate 34 (normal symbol starting gate).

Further, in (b) of FIG. 79, the result screen 670 is hidden, and the first reservation display section 630a and the reservation consumption area 640 are displayed. In this way, the result screen 670 that is started to be displayed during the variable display game based on the last remaining first balance is the same as the first (initial) second
The variable display based on the remaining balance will be hidden at the timing when the game stops changing. Note that the production control device 300 displays the first pending display section 630a to display the second remaining pending item, while hiding the pending consumption area 640 along with the result screen 670 to display the second remaining pending item that is being used. The pending status (display pending while changing) may be hidden.

(S) in FIG. 80 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

The performance control device 300 switches the performance from the result mode to the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage) during the excessive hold consumption mode, hides the result screen 670, and displays the variable display area 610 on the display screen. That is, the excessive retention digestion mode can be divided into a result mode and a special mode.

In the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage), the special figure 2 variable display game to use up the second remaining reserve is relatively short compared to the average value of the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Runs with variable time (fixed variable time value). Further, the background and stage of the display screen in the special mode may be a dedicated background or stage different from those in the normal game state, or may be the same as those in the normal game state.

In addition, in the special mode, the second hold display section 630b is not displayed and the first hold display section 630b is not displayed.
0a is displayed. Then, the displayed first starting memory (special figure 1 pending) pending display 633f
remains on standby in the first hold display section 630a without being digested, and the hidden second start memory (
Special Figure 2 Pending) is prioritized and consumed (Special Figure 2 Priority Variation). In addition, the special figure 2 reservation number can be easily confirmed from the number "2" displayed on the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660.

Further, in the hold expiration area 640, a hold display 633c (for example, “▽”) corresponding to the second remaining hold is displayed. Therefore, a player who visually confirms that the hold display 633f of the first hold display section 630a does not shift to hold and that the hold display 633c of the second remaining hold is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640, may It can be easily recognized that the variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game. In this way, the starting memory of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the special mode is the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending).
become.

Note that the second remaining hold (fluctuating hold display 633c) displayed in the hold extinguishment area 640 may be hidden, and as shown in (7) of FIG. 87, which will be described later, the first starting memory ( It may be displayed in the same display mode (for example, "〇") as the special figure 1 pending).

(Se) of FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special drawing 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third second remaining reservation, and (S) of FIG. This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second remaining reservation.

As shown in (se) of FIG. 80, the third second remaining hold, that is, the changing hold display 633d
The special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the same manner as shown in FIG. becomes "1".

In addition, as shown in FIG.
The special figure 2 variable display game is similarly executed based on the second starting memory corresponding to 33e, and the number indicating the special figure 2 pending number on the special figure 2 pending number display section 660 becomes "0".

In addition, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation in the result mode and special mode shown in FIG. 79 (sa) to FIG. .

In other words, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reserve is the special figure 2 variable display game during time reduction ((e) in Figure 78) and the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first remaining reserve (Figure 78). No(o)～
Compared to (b) in FIG. 79, the fluctuation time is shorter and ends early (fluctuation stops).

In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation has a shorter variable time than the special figure 1 variable display game ((a) to (c) in FIG. 78) that is executed during the time reduction. finish.

Therefore, after the series of performances in the time saving mode and the remaining reservation consumption mode during time saving are completed, the second remaining reservation is quickly consumed in the excessive reservation consumption mode (first performance), and the second remaining reservation is quickly exhausted in the normal mode (second
You can return to the performance (direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transition state from being prolonged, and the game can be played at a good tempo, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game that is executed during time reduction also has a shorter variable time and ends earlier than the special figure 2 variable display game during time reduction and the special figure 2 variable display game based on the 1st remaining reservation. . Therefore, while suppressing the extension of the special figure 1 variable display game executed at the start of time saving, the special figure 2 pending can be accumulated and the special figure 2 variable display game can be promptly started. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the series of effects accompanying the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game without interruption, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Part (ta) of FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining balance stops changing.

For example, as shown in FIG.
"), when the fluctuation is stopped, the pending display 633e during fluctuation in the pending consumption area 640 is hidden,
The number indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations on the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "0".

When all the second remaining reservations are exhausted, the special mode ends and the performance switches to the normal mode.
Further, a left-handed hitting display 671 (left-handed hitting instruction image) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The left-handed batting display 671 is a display for instructing the player to bat left-handed.

Note that the left-handed display 671 is displayed not only when all the second remaining reservations are exhausted, but also after the end of time reduction (
It may be displayed in (o) of FIG. 78. In addition, the left-handed display 671 is the timing (see) in FIG. 79 when the result screen 670 is displayed, the timing (sa) in FIG. 80 (su)
It may be displayed at the timing of.

(C) of FIG. 80 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first starting memory (special figure 1 pending).

Due to the hold shift, the changing hold display 633f corresponding to the special figure 1 hold moves from the first hold display section 630a to the hold extinguishing area 640 and is displayed, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the special figure 1 hold. is executed.

Part (1) of FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game stops changing.

Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (T), when the variable display game stops changing at a missed symbol (for example, "521"), all of the special symbols 1 and 2 are used up.
Thereafter, the next variable display game is started by generating the first starting memory or the second starting memory.

In addition, in the normal mode (left-handed play) in which the normal variable prize winning device 37 is difficult to open, it is usually difficult for the second starting memory to occur, and the player starts the variable display game based on the first starting memory. Usually, the player aims to win a game ball in the starting winning hole 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1).

In addition, in the normal mode in which the first starting memory normally occurs, if the second starting memory occurs (when the low probability of normal pattern is greater than 0%), ) and during the special mode shown in FIGS.
A hold display section 630b may be displayed to display a hold display corresponding to the generated second starting memory. Thereby, in the normal mode, the player can recognize that the second starting memory has occurred.

On the other hand, if the second starting memory occurs in the normal mode (when the low probability of normal pattern is greater than 0%), during the result display in Figure 79(k)(sa) or in Figure 79(su)~ Similar to (that) special mode, the production control device 300 does not display the second pending display section 630b, and the second
It is not necessary to display the hold display corresponding to the starting memory. Thereby, even if the second start memory occurs in the normal mode, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

[Example of screen transition from time saving state in 100 time saving machine]
With reference to FIG. 81, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the second start memory from the time saving state in the 100 time saving machine will be described. In the following description, the same contents as those in FIGS. 78 to 80 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition from the time saving state in the 100 time saving machine. In addition, the 100-time saving machine (time saving machine) is
This is a general game machine that can shift to a time saving state (specific game state) and can generate a time saving state (general power support state) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after winning a jackpot.

() in FIG. 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the first time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed after the gaming state changes to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot.

The hold extinguishing area 640 has been switched to a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex pedestal") for digesting the second starting memory, and on the convex pedestal, a floating hold display 633v indicates that the special figure 2 is on hold. (
The second starting memory) is displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽").

In the pending pending display 633v in the pending usage area 640, for example, characters such as "99 remaining" that inform the player of the remaining number of times in the time saving mode (remaining number of time saving) are displayed. Furthermore, Figure 81
In the diagrams described below, an explanatory note "X time reduction" is shown above the second hold display section 630b so that the number of time reductions can be seen, but " Time saving x
It is also possible to notify the player of the number of times saved by actually displaying the characters "time". By notifying the number of times of time saving in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which time the variable display game is currently in the time saving state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Further, in the second suspension display section 630b, a suspension display 633u is displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second starting memory. At the bottom of the pending display 633u, the pending display 6
A rectangular square (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed as a predetermined display mode indicating that 33u will be consumed within the time saving period. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize until which time the time saving state continues until the hold display, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(H) in FIG. 81 shows that the special figure 2 variable display game is then repeated in the time saving state, and the time saving 9
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the fifth special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

In the pending pending display 633w of the pending completion area 640, for example, the remaining number of time reductions, such as "5 remaining", is displayed. Further, in the second suspension display section 630b, suspension displays 633x, 633y, and 633z are displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second starting memory. At the bottom of the hold displays 633x, 633y, and 633z, a pedestal in a predetermined display format (for example, "□") indicating that the hold will be consumed during the time reduction is displayed, similar to the hold display 633u described above.

(U2) of FIG. 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game that was being executed in (H) of FIG. 81 stops changing.

For example, as shown in (U2) of FIG.
8''), the next variable display game will be executed in accordance with the standby hold (start memory), similar to (c) in FIG. Also, in (U2) of Figure 81, a new second
A start memory is generated, and a hold display 633 is displayed on the second hold display section 630b.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game stops changing, the pending extinguishing area 640 displays a floating pending display until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the next second start memory that is on standby is executed. is not displayed, and only a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex pedestal") for digesting the second starting memory is displayed. In addition, the performance control device 300 may perform a shift performance of the hold shift (a performance in which the hold shifts), and then execute the next special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory, and performs the shift performance. The special figure 2 variable display game may be executed after instantly switching the hold display to the next position (the position after the hold shift). In addition, while the fluctuation is stopped, a hold display with a different color and transparency from the change pending display during fluctuation is displayed in the hold expiration area 640, and the remaining number of times for the next time saving (for example, "4 remaining") is displayed. Good too.

(E2) of FIG. 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the 96th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

In the pending pending display 633x in the pending completion area 640, for example, the remaining number of time reductions, such as "4 remaining", is displayed. In addition, the second hold display section 630b newly displays a hold display 633a in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second start memory.

Here, the production control device 300 adds a new hold display 63 as shown in (E2) of FIG.
On the pedestal (for example, "□") at the bottom of 3a, characters "Last" can be displayed to notify the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the player can recognize the timing of the time-saving end from the pending display without having to pay close attention to the part that displays the remaining number of times, making it easier to understand the flow of the game and increasing the interest of the game. .

(2) of FIG. 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the 97th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second reservation display section 630b includes a reservation display 633 corresponding to the second starting memory (special map 2 reservation).
b is newly displayed. The hold display 633b indicates the remaining hold (predetermined remaining hold, first remaining hold, remaining hold that occurs during time saving) that will be used up in the transition state (normal gaming state in terms of probability) after the time saving state ends. It is. In this way, when the remaining number of time reductions becomes three or less, the remaining reservations to be used up after the time reduction ends start to accumulate in the second reservation display section 630b.

In addition, the remaining reservation that is consumed after the time saving ends is the second starting memory, and the jackpot symbol random number in the second starting memory is an advantageous one that has a higher probability of occurrence of a variable state than the jackpot symbol random number in the first starting memory. It is sorted. Therefore, during the transition state in which the remaining reservation is used up (remaining reservation consumption mode), it is a normal gaming state in terms of probability, but it can also be said that it is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, the production control device 300 may also display a pedestal (for example, "□") at the bottom of the newly displayed pending display 633b as a predetermined display mode. Even with this display mode,
The player can visually recognize the word "Last" on the pedestal at the bottom of the hold display 633a, and can recognize the timing of the end of the time saving from the hold display. In addition, the display format of the hold display will be the same for the hold that will be used up during the time reduction and the remaining hold that will be used up after the time reduction ends, increasing consistency.
It is possible to suppress the production in the time-saving mode from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(2) of FIG. 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the 98th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second reservation display section 630b includes a reservation display 633 corresponding to the second starting memory (special map 2 reservation).
c is newly displayed. The hold display 633c also indicates a remaining hold like the hold display 633b.

Thereafter, when the 99th time saving special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the display screen of the display device 41 changes to the same screen transition as shown in FIG. The screen transition will be similar to (ke). Then, after the time reduction ends, the production control device 300 (
A result screen 670 may be displayed as shown in (b) Transition.

In addition, in the screen transition example of (ki) to (ke) in FIG. 79 for the above-mentioned one-type and two-type mixer, the reservation displays 633b, 633c, 633d, and 633e displayed on the second reservation display section 630b are It was explained that this is the second remaining amount pending. However, if the time saving 100 times machine changes from (2) in Figure 81 to (K) to (K) in Figure 79, the hold display 6
33b, 633c, 633d, and 633e are the first remaining reservations (remaining reservations) that occur during the time reduction and are cleared after the time reduction ends. The special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining 4 pieces can be executed after 100 time-savings, so the player can play the special figure 2 variable display game a total of 104 times (100 + 4 times) to aim for the jackpot. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Example of screen transition in modified example of special map 2 pending display]
With reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a display mode in which the result display is continued until the special drawing 2 holding is completely consumed will be described as a display form of a modified example of the special drawing 2 holding display. In addition, the modified examples up to FIG. 87 below are the gaming machine 1 of the 1 type and 2 type mixing machine (1 time saving number of times) explained in FIGS. 78 to 80.
This is a modification of the special figure 2 pending display in 0.

FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in a modification of the special figure 2 pending display. FIG. 83 is an example (second half) of the screen transition in a modification of the special figure 2 pending display.

(2) in FIG. 82 shows the display on the display device 41 when the special drawing 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reservation in the reservation extinguishment mode during the time reduction after the time reduction ends. It's a screen.

After the hold shift, when the special map 2 variable display game is executed based on the fluctuating hold display 633 of the third first remaining hold (second starting memory), the fluctuating hold display 633 of the hold extinguishing area 640
The remaining number of modes displayed is, for example, "1 remaining". In addition, special drawing 1 reservation number display section 65
The number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number of 0 is "1", and the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number on the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 is "4". In other words, in (ki 2) of Fig. 82, the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 are the same as in (ki) of Fig. 79, and the number of the first remaining reservations waiting is one, and the number of remaining reservations of the second remaining number is 1. There are 3 pieces.

Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (ki 2), the production control device 300 displays the first remaining reservation display 633a, while not displaying the three second remaining reservation reservation displays. therefore,
Since only the first remaining hold (hold display 633a) is displayed, it is difficult to determine which hold is to be used until the effect in the predetermined effect mode (remaining hold extinguishment mode that occurs during time reduction in transition state) is executed. This makes it easier for players to understand, and increases the interest of the game. In addition, since only the first remaining hold that has a strong relationship with the performance to be executed is displayed, effective performances can be performed, and the second remaining hold that has a weak relationship is hidden, so it does not interfere with the performance. Since the player can easily concentrate on the performance, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the diagrams after (ki 2) of FIG. 82, the reservation display of the second remaining reservation is not displayed, but the number "4" indicating the number of special drawings 2 reservation is displayed in the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of reserved special drawings 2.

(2) of FIG. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation after the time reduction ends.

After the hold shift, special drawing 2 is displayed based on the changing hold display 633a, which is the 4th first remaining hold.
The variable display game is executed in the same manner as in (2) of FIG. 82, and the remaining number of modes displayed in the variable pending display 633a of the pending consumption area 640 is switched to, for example, "0 remaining".

In addition, the production control device 300 maintains a state in which the second remaining pending display is not displayed on the second pending display section 630b. The number indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 on the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 is “
3".

In (ke 2) of FIG. 82, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold, and after (k2) of FIG. 82, the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold) is executed. This is the display screen of the display device 41 when this occurs.

When the second remaining reservation in the second starting memory occurs, the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number on the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "4". At that time, since no pending display is displayed on the second pending display section 630b, the special figure 2 pending number display section 6
A character (for example, a character "new") may be displayed near 60 to notify that the second starting memory has occurred.

(2) of FIG. 82 shows the display device 41 when the special drawing 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation and the transition is made to the result screen 670 after (2) of FIG. This is the display screen.

In the second half of the variation of the special drawing 2 variation display game based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining balance, the production control device 300 displays a result screen 6 showing the game results for a predetermined period on the display screen of the display device 41.
70 is displayed (result display). While displaying the result screen 670, the production control device 300 maintains a state in which the second remaining pending display is not displayed on the second pending display section 630b. Therefore, on the display screen, the second remaining pending display is no longer displayed, and instead the result screen 670 is displayed in a large size, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the result screen 670, thereby increasing the interest of the game. I can do it.

(S2) of FIG. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while the result is being displayed.

With the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation, the performance is switched from the remaining reservation consumption mode that occurs during time reduction to the excessive reservation consumption mode (result mode). The result screen 670 continues to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

(2) in FIG. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining balance stops changing. In addition, (S2) to (S2) of FIG. 83 are the display screens of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations. It is.

In this modification, for example, even if the special drawing 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops changing, the result mode continues, and as shown in (2) of FIG. 82, the result screen 670 is displayed. Display is maintained. In addition, in the fluctuation display area 615, the small symbols stop fluctuating, and the missing symbols (
For example, "267").

After that, the result mode continues even when the special map 2 variable display game is executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations, and the result mode continues from (2) to (2) in Figure 83. As shown in
The display of result screen 670 is maintained. At that time, the number indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations in the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 decreases by one each time the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and finally the number shown in FIG. ) becomes "0" as shown.

Therefore, the result mode is maintained until all the second remaining reservations are used up, so it is possible to secure a longer time for checking the result screen 670, and the player does not have to worry about the result of the game. You will be able to slowly check the Further, since the result screen 670 can be displayed for a relatively long time, the performance control device 300 may display more detailed data such as the content of the performance on the result screen 670.

(T2) of FIG. 82 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining balance stops changing.

When the special drawing 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation stops changing, the result mode is ended, the performance is switched to the normal mode, and the result screen 670 is hidden. Also,
In the variable display area 610 of the display screen, the outlier symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, "41
6”) is displayed. Then, as in (ta) of FIG. 80, the pending consumption area 640, the first pending display section 630a, and the left-handed play display 671 are displayed. First hold display section 630a
, a reservation display 633f corresponding to special drawing 1 reservation is displayed.

After that, in (chi 2) (tsu 2) of Fig. 82, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first starting memory (special figure 1 pending), similar to (chi) (tsu) of Fig. 80. , a missed pattern (for example, "5"
21"), the fluctuation stops.

In addition, the timing at which the result screen 670 is hidden is not limited to the timing when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining balance stops changing, but also at the timing when the special chart 1 variable display game starts. Alternatively, the timing may be set at a time when both conditions are met.

[Example of screen transition in modification example 2 of special map 2 pending display]
Referring to FIG. 84, the display mode at the time of displaying the result will be described as the display mode of the second modification of the special drawing 2 pending display.

FIG. 84 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in modification example 2 of the special figure 2 pending display.

(k) in FIG. 84 indicates that during the short-time generated remaining hold consumption mode, after (h) in FIG. Starting memory (Special figure 2 pending)
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when this occurs, and is the same as that shown in FIG. When the second remaining hold in the second starting memory occurs, the hold display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new").

(3) in FIG. 84 shows the state of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation and the transition is made to the result screen 670 after (ke) in FIG. This is the display screen.

The special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining reservation, and in the second half of the variation, the production control device 300 displays the result.

At that time, in modification example 2 of the special drawing 2 pending display, the production control device 300 hides the variable display area 610 while displaying the result, while displaying the second pending display section 630b and the pending extinguishing area 640.
maintain the display. Therefore, the player can confirm the number of special drawings 2 holdings by visually checking the special drawings 2 holding number display section 660 and the holding display of the second holding display section 630b, and also confirm that the special drawings 2 holdings are the second You can also easily confirm that the balance is on hold.

Note that in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, there is a variable display area 6 as shown in FIG.
Since the result screen 670 is displayed in a large size instead of 10, the result screen 67
It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize 0, and the interest in the game can be increased.

(S3) of FIG. 84 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while displaying the result in the result mode.

The display of the result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen of the display device 41, and at the top of the fluctuating pending display 633b of the pending consumption area 640, there is a character "END" indicating the end of the short-time accrued remaining pending consumption mode. is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the series of performances by the plurality of special figure 2 variable display games based on the special figure 2 hold and the first remaining hold during the time reduction have ended.

In addition, the first second remaining hold is located in the hold extinguishing area 640 as the changing hold display 633b, and hold displays 633c, 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold in the second hold display section 630b.
3d and 633e are also located one position to the left. In addition, in the result mode (excessive hold consumption mode), the performance control device 300 omits the shift performance of the hold shift in accordance with the shortening change (fixed variable time value) of the special figure 2 change display game, and displays the second remaining hold. may be digested more quickly. Further, the performance control device 300 may display in an easy-to-understand manner to the player which pending display has been completed, without omitting the shift performance of the pending shift.

(3) of FIG. 84 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining balance stops changing.

For example, in the second modification of the special chart 2 pending display, even if the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first and second remaining pending display stops changing, the result mode does not end, and in (3) of Fig. 84. As shown, the display of the result screen 670, the second hold display section 630b, and the hold consumption area 640 is maintained.
In the fluctuation display area 615, a small symbol of a missed symbol (for example, "267") fluctuates and stops.

Then, in the result mode, the result screen 67 is displayed until all the second remaining reservations are exhausted and the variable display area 610 and the first reservation display section 630a are displayed, as shown in (ta 2) of FIG.
0, the display of the second suspension display section 630b and the suspension expiration area 640 is also maintained. Therefore, the player can easily confirm which pending display has been used up until all the second remaining holds have been used up.

[Example of screen transition in modification 3 of special map 2 pending display]
With reference to FIG. 85, the display mode before the result display will be described as the display mode of the third modification of the special drawing 2 pending display.

FIG. 85 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in Modification 3 of the special figure 2 pending display.

(4) in FIG. 85 shows the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reservation during the time reduction generation remaining reservation consumption mode after the time reduction ends. This is the display screen.

In (ki 4) of FIG. 85, the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold in the second hold display section 630b
3b, 633c, and 633d have the same display mode (
For example, it is displayed as "〇").

On the other hand, the hold display 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold is in a predetermined display format (for example, "▽")
A pedestal (for example, "□") is displayed at the bottom of the pending display 633a.

(4) (ke4) of FIG. 85 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation. In (ke4) of Figure 85, a new second
The second remaining reservation has occurred as a starting memory (special figure 2 reservation). Similarly, in (4) and (4) of FIG. 85, reservation displays 633b and 633c corresponding to the second remaining reservation in the second reservation display section 630b are shown.
, 633d, and 633e are displayed in the same display manner (for example, "O") as the hold display of the first starting memory (special figure 1 hold).

Therefore, the second remaining hold that is cleared in the excessive hold consumption mode (result mode, special mode) is displayed in the same display manner as the hold display of the first starting memory that is cleared in the normal mode to which the transition immediately occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity in the performance that occurs when the second remaining hold and the hold display of the first starting memory are displayed in different display modes. Also, the second remaining reservation and the first
By displaying the pending display of the starting memory in a common display mode, it is possible to prevent the variable display from interfering with the performance during the game, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the performance, and increasing the interest of the game. .

Thereafter, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect to the result mode of the excessive hold consumption mode and display the result screen 670 as shown in FIG. 79 (result display).

[Example of screen transition in modification examples 4 and 5 of special map 2 pending display]
With reference to FIG. 86, the display mode after the result display will be described as the display mode of modification examples 4 and 5 of the special drawing 2 pending display.

FIG. 86 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in Modifications 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 pending display.

(Sa) of FIG. 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while displaying the result in the result mode,
This is the same as (sa) in FIG. After that, for example, in the display mode of modification 4 of the special drawing 2 pending display, the screen transitions as shown in (5) of FIG. 86, and in the display mode of modification 5, the screen transitions as shown in (6) of FIG.
The screen transitions like this.

(5) in FIG. 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 in modification example 4 of the special chart 2 pending display when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining pending has stopped changing. .

In (5) of FIG. 86, the hold display 633c, 63 based on the second starting memory (second remaining hold)
3d, 633e and a hold display 633f based on the first starting memory are in the common hold display section 630.
They are displayed together in c.

The common hold display area 630c is a common hold display area for the hold display based on the second starting memory (second remaining hold) and the hold display based on the first starting memory. In other words, the common reservation display section 630
c is a display unit including a first hold display unit 630a and a second hold display unit 630b.

In addition, the production control device 300 displays the hold display of the second remaining hold in a predetermined display form (for example, "▽") so that it can be easily distinguished from the display form of the hold display of the first starting memory (for example, "〇"). It can be displayed in

Therefore, by using the common hold display section 630c and displaying holds in a plurality of display modes, it becomes easier to see the number and types of hold displays that are waiting, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the flow of the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(S5) in FIG. 86 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is subsequently executed based on the second second remaining reservation. From result mode to special mode (
Even if the performance is switched to the special mode), the performance control device 300 similarly displays the common hold display section 6.
30c can be displayed to collectively display the hold status.

Thereafter, after the special symbol fluctuation display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the production control device 300 changes the screen as shown in (ta) of FIG. 80, for example. You can switch the performance from special mode to normal mode.

On the other hand, (6) of FIG. 86 shows the display of the display device 41 in the fifth modification of the special figure 2 pending display when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining pending has stopped changing. It's a screen.

In (6) of FIG. 86, the first reservation display area 630 is divided into independent reservation display areas.
a and the second hold display section 630b are simultaneously displayed at the bottom of the display screen.

Note that the production control device 300 displays the display area of the second hold display section 630b (for example, a rectangular frame with a broken line) so that it can be easily distinguished from the display area of the first hold display section 630a (for example, a square frame with a solid line). can do.

(S6) of FIG. 86 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is subsequently executed based on the second second reservation. In accordance with the movement of the reservation display, that is, according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, the ratio occupied by the first reservation display section 630a in the independent reservation display area increases, and the ratio occupied by the second reservation display section 630b decreases. .

Therefore, by comparing the proportions occupied by the first hold display section 630a and the second hold display section 630b in the independent hold display areas, it becomes easier to understand the number of second hold cases remaining on standby, and the player can Since it becomes easier to understand the flow of the game, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

After that, after the special symbol fluctuation display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the production control device 300, for example, similarly to the fourth modification, the (ta) of FIG. Screen transitions can be made as shown in .

[Example of screen transition in modification 6 of special map 2 pending display]
Referring to FIG. 87, as a display mode of modification 6 of the special drawing 2 pending display, a display mode of pending consumption after displaying the result will be described.

FIG. 87 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in modification example 6 of the special figure 2 pending display.

(Sa) in FIG. 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while displaying the result in the result mode,
This is the same as (sa) in FIG. In addition, (b) in FIG. 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining balance stops changing, and is the same as (b) in FIG. 79. It is.

When the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold is stopped by a missed symbol (for example, "267"), the production control device 300 ends the result display and hides the result screen 670, A variable display area 610 in which the losing symbol is displayed is displayed.

(S7) in FIG. 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second remaining reservation, the reservation extinguishing area 640 is displayed without changing the position of the reservation display 633f of the first starting memory of the first reservation display section 630a.
A floating pending display 633c is displayed. The fluctuating hold display 633c is a fluctuating hold display based on the second second remaining hold.

In addition, as shown in (7) of FIG. 87, the production control device 300 displays the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory (for example, "〇") instead of the predetermined display mode (for example, "▽"). ), a pending change display 633c can be displayed.

In this way, by displaying the fluctuating hold display 633c of the second remaining hold in the same common display format (e.g. "〇") as the hold display of the first starting memory, the second remaining hold and the first starting memory It is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity in the performance that occurs when the on-hold display during fluctuation takes on a different display mode. In addition, by displaying the second remaining hold and the first start memory fluctuating hold display in a common display format, it is possible to prevent the variable display from interfering with the performance during the game, so that the player can concentrate on the performance. This makes the game easier and makes the game more interesting.

Thereafter, after the special symbol fluctuation display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the production control device 300 causes the screen to transition as shown in (ta) of FIG. 80, for example. be able to.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes games (variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game),
Special figure 2 variable display game) (display device 41). In the gaming machine 10, the game control means can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state (time saving mode)) as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the performance control means can generate a normal gaming state (normal mode) from the specific gaming state. (transition state (excessive hold consumption mode)), a predetermined starting memory display (second starting memory) is displayed according to the starting memory (second starting memory) of the main game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state. 2 remaining pending display) on specific display sections of the display means (starting memory display area (holding consumption area 640, first pending display section 630a, second
It is not displayed on the hold display section 630b)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to use a display mode that makes it easier for the player to understand which suspension is to be completed until a performance (a series of performances) corresponding to a specific gaming state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a starting storage means (RAM 111c of the gaming control device 100) capable of storing starting memories (first starting memory, second starting memory) as the right to execute the game. The production control means includes a starting memory that occurs in a specific game state (a second starting memory that is consumed during time saving,
A starting memory display (for example, a rectangular square frame serving as a pedestal (display of "□") as a predetermined display mode) can be displayed on the specific display section according to the first remaining reservation, etc.).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the hold display is displayed in a plurality of display modes, the number and type of hold display becomes easy to understand, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the performance control means executes the first performance (excessive reservation mode (result mode, special mode)) and the subsequent second performance (normal mode) after the end of the specific game state, and 2 performance is executed in connection with the main game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the normal gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the game based on the second starting memory is executed in a manner different from the game based on the first starting memory, so it is difficult to determine which starting memory the game in progress is based on. It becomes easier for the player to understand whether there are any. As a result, the player can particularly increase his or her expectations regarding the outcome of the game when the player is in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the performance control means is capable of switching the performance mode when a predetermined number of games (for example, 100) are completed based on the start memory that occurred in a specific gaming state.
For example, switching from a time-saving mode to a normal mode), and displaying a starting memory display in a special manner according to the starting memory of the last game (for example, the 100th time) among a predetermined number of games.
For example, "LAST" is displayed on the lower pedestal).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can recognize the end timing of a specific gaming state from the pending display without paying close attention to the display of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, so that the player can grasp the flow of the game. This makes the game easier to play and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the specific display section includes a standby/hold display area (a first hold display section 630a, a second hold display section 630b) that displays a start memory display before the game is executed, and a start memory display area that displays the start memory display during game execution. It includes at least one of the pending pending display areas (pending consumption area 640) that display the display.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the player visually recognizes at least either the standby hold display area or the fluctuating hold display area, it corresponds to the specific game state until which hold (starting memory) is exhausted. Since it is possible to ascertain whether a performance (a series of performances) will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means displays a special image (result screen 670) can be displayed, and even if the starting memory of the main game in a specific gaming state occurs after the specific gaming state (second remaining pending), a special display will be displayed until all games based on the starting memory are finished. The image is displayed continuously, and while the special image is being displayed, the game execution time is not selected by distribution (lottery) and is fixed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the special image is continuously displayed until the main starting memory (second remaining pending) in a specific gaming state is completely exhausted, so that the game in progress is
It becomes easier for the player to understand whether the game is based on the starting memory, the starting memory or the second starting memory, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the performance control means displays a predetermined starting memory display corresponding to a starting memory (occurrence pending during time reduction, first remaining pending) that occurs in a specific gaming state and the game is executed after the specific gaming state. (Fluctuating pending display in the pending execution area 640) to indicate the number of games (number of game executions) until all games based on the starting memory are completed (notifying the player of the remaining number of times of a predetermined performance mode) (for example, "remaining x").

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can easily grasp the timing at which the game ends based on the start memory that occurs in a specific gaming state and the game is executed after the specific gaming state, so that the player can increase the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a predetermined starting memory display (a pending display of the second starting memory (e.g. "▽")) is performed between the starting memory that occurred in a specific gaming state and the starting memory that occurred after the specific gaming state. is displayed in a different manner (with or without a predetermined display manner (for example, a rectangular square "□" serving as a pedestal)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the player can easily identify the starting memory that occurred in a specific gaming state, the performance (series of performances) corresponding to the specific gaming state is executed until which hold is exhausted. This makes it easier to understand what is going on, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment mainly focuses on a state in which the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 pending, remaining pending) can occur during a time saving state (general power support state, electric support) as a specific game state. The present invention relates to a display mode of an occurrence standby display and an occurrence effect for notifying the occurrence. The third embodiment also relates to the display mode of the start memory display (suspension display), but relates to a display mode different from the second embodiment.

[Example of screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state when the second start memory occurrence standby display and occurrence effect are performed]
With reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, a hold display (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory after the time saving state from the time saving state when the second starting memory generation standby display and the occurrence effect is performed
The display mode will be explained.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the winning symbol A-
Regarding G (FIG. 55), an example will be mainly explained in which the number of time reductions after a jackpot is changed to one, and the number of remaining reservations that occur in the time reduction state (time reduction mode, specific game state) is changed to one. By setting the upper limit of the number of special drawings 2 reserved (A2905 in FIG. 9) to 1, the number of remaining reservations that occur in the time saving state can be reduced to 1 (the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 reserved remains 4). In addition, the number of remaining reservations that occur in the time saving state may be 4 (the upper limit of the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved are both 4). Further, in the third embodiment, the normal power opening pattern is set to be opened only once per general power grid (the second half opening (FIG. 56) is eliminated). Further, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an example in which the small hit probability is 1/8 will be described, but the small win probability may have other values.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the gaming control device 100 controls the generated second
Up to one starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 pending) can be stored. Note that, like the first embodiment and the second embodiment, up to four first starting memories (special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 pending) can be stored.

FIG. 88 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment in chronological order, from the time saving state to the time saving state when the occurrence standby display and occurrence effect of the second start memory are performed. This is an example (first half) of the screen transition. Moreover, FIG. 89 is an example (second half) of screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state.

88(a) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state changes to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (after the round game). The performance control device 300 can start a specific performance mode (time saving mode and subsequent remaining pending consumption mode) on the display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state becomes the time saving state. In (na) of FIG. 88, there is no first starting memory or second starting memory, and the variable display game is not being executed. Note that the specific performance mode may be started when the gaming state is a jackpot state (special gaming state). For example, in a jackpot state, a specific production mode may be started at the start of the round (first round), or a specific production mode may be started in the middle of the round (eighth round or 16th round), so that the player can The player may be made to expect a promotion lottery that will lead to an advantageous gaming state. The production mode (production stage) during the stay may be displayed in text or as a background on the display screen of the display device 41.

A variable display area 615 is provided on the left side of the display screen of the display device 41 in which a variable display game is executed using decorative special symbols (small symbols). The small symbols in the variable display area 615 are stopped and displayed (for example, "333") in a specific result mode (special result mode) that is the stop symbol of the previous variable display game, that is, when a jackpot occurs.

In addition, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C
) is displayed at the top of the display screen. Note that the plurality of variable display areas 610 can be displayed at the center of the display screen, for example, during the normal gaming state. When the variable display game is being executed, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed. Furthermore, the results of the variable display in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 have contents that match each other.

Below the variable display area 615 on the left side of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are provided. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 display the number "0" indicating the number of special plots 1 reserved and the number "0" indicating the number of special plots 2 reserved, respectively. .

In the center of the display screen of the display device 41, large occurrence standby displays 672g and 672h (large occurrence standby display, display mode A) are displayed.

The generation standby displays 672g and 672h are displays corresponding to the second start memory that can be generated in the time saving mode. By visually recognizing the occurrence standby displays 672g and 672h, the player can recognize the number of second start memories scheduled to occur in the time saving mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the number of games (number of variable display games) to be executed in a specific performance mode. In other words, the specifications of the game (game) in a specific performance mode can be easily communicated to the player, so that the player can play the game appropriately and carry out the performance intended by the producer, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, the occurrence standby displays 672g and 672h are displayed on the second hold display section 630b as a start memory display area (specific display section, specific display area). For example, the performance control device 300 may display the second hold display section 630b in the upper layer (front surface, player side) of the display screen. By adopting such an aspect, even if the plurality of variable display areas 610 are not hidden, the variable display areas 610 are drawn on the lower layer (back side, back side) of the second pending display section 630b. The large pattern in the variable display area 610 can be prevented from being displayed on the display screen. In addition, during the period in which the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending) shown in (a) to (nu) in FIG. It may be displayed in a smaller size. In other words, the occurrence standby display 672g, 672h and the hold display 6 during the period of storing hold
33g and 633h can be displayed larger than the large pattern (occurrence standby display 672
g, 672h, pending display 633g, 633h > large pattern).

In the upper left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the words "Preparing" are displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen, for example, a right-hand hitting display (right-hand hitting instruction image) such as "Right hitting →" is displayed. By visually recognizing the characters "Preparing" on the display screen together with the generation standby displays 672g and 672h, the player generates a second starting memory to start a specific performance in the time saving mode and displays the special figure 2 variable display. Able to properly recognize the need to play a game. In addition, in order to do so, the player needs to hit the game ball to the right and enter the second starting winning hole (starting hole 2, second starting winning area) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity). This can be recognized from the characters "Right hit →" on the display screen. In addition, the production control device 300 is "in preparation"
Instead of displaying the characters, a countdown display (for example, displaying "Ato 06:97") may be performed by starting the special map 2 variable display game at ( ) in FIG. 88, which will be described later. . In addition, the production control device 300 is configured not to display the words "Preparing" or a countdown display even when the special symbol 1 variable display game is being executed, for example, when the special symbol 2 variable display game is not being played. Can be done. Moreover, the production control device 300 can stop updating the time and prevent the countdown from being performed when the countdown display is not displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game may be executed based on the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) that occurred before the jackpot game, or may be executed based on the first starting memory that occurred after the jackpot game. I can do it.

(2) in FIG. 88 is a display screen of the display device 41 when a second starting memory for a hold (time-saving hold) to be consumed during a time-saving period is generated. When the second starting memory for time-saving hold occurs, the effect control device 300 generates the second starting memory generation effect (
(short-term hold).

When the second starting memory generation effect (time-saving hold) is performed, for example, a holding display 633g corresponding to the second starting memory is displayed in a large moving manner on the display screen of the display device 41 (display mode B), and the second starting memory is What happened is emphasized. Further, the hold display 633g is gradually displayed (fade-in) or enlarged (zoomed in) to give the player an impression of excitement (pop), so that the manner in which the hold display 633g occurs is changed. It may be displayed in an emphasized manner. In this way, the hold display 633g may be displayed in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the second starting memory has occurred.

In addition, when the second starting memory occurs, the special figure 2 variable display game will start immediately, so the pending display 633g will be displayed as shown in FIG. ) is on hold (display mode B). In addition, by starting the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) in the variable display area 615 will be displayed in a variable manner ("↓↓↓"
) to be done.

On the other hand, the occurrence standby display 672h is displayed in a small size on the right side of the lower part of the screen (occurrence standby small display, display mode C). Therefore, compared to the hold display 633g that is displayed large in display mode B, the occurrence standby display 672h is displayed smaller in display mode C, which is less noticeable, so that the player is not exposed to the second start memory generation effect (time-saving hold). It can make it easier to attract attention.

In addition, since the generated second starting memory is being immediately consumed and the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the stored second starting memory is deleted, so the second starting memory generated during the time saving mode is further One can be stored (up to the upper limit value can be stored). The word "Preparing" displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the display device 41 is replaced by a countdown display (for example, "At 06:97") that displays the time until a specific performance starts in a countdown format.
). Therefore, it is possible to impress upon the player that he must accumulate the reserve (second starting memory) for the number of games to be subsequently executed in the specific presentation mode. Note that the countdown display is not limited to displaying the time (period, timing) until a specific production starts, but also displaying the time (period, timing) for which the player wants to accumulate the second starting memory. It may be.

88 is the display screen of the display device 41 after the second starting memory generation effect (time saving hold) is performed.

When the second starting memory generation effect (time-saving hold) is finished, the center of the display screen of the display device 41 shows
The large occurrence standby display 672h (large occurrence standby display, display mode A) is displayed again. Also,
In the position where the large occurrence standby display 672g was displayed in (na) of FIG. 88, a large pending display 633g (large display pending for processing, pending display during fluctuation, display mode D) is displayed. Ru.

Further, as time passes, the time of the countdown display (for example, "Ato 02:36") displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the display device 41 decreases (counts down).

() in FIG. 88 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the battle performance is started in the second half variation of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory for time-saving hold. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game enters the latter half of the variation, the production in a specific production mode develops, and the battle production is started, the large symbol in the variable display area 610 is hidden. Note that the large pattern in the variable display area 610 may continue to be displayed.

When the countdown display reaches 00:00, the special figure 2 variable display game changes to the second half, and a battle effect, for example, is started as a specific effect in the time saving mode. In addition, in (ne) of FIG. 88, the countdown display "Ato 00:00" is left on the display screen for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the battle performance starts, but the performance control device 300 The countdown display may be hidden when switching the mode performance to battle performance.

Further, as described above, the countdown display may display the time (period, timing) for which the player wants to store the second starting memory, and in this case, the production control device 30
0 may be displayed as a countdown until the fluctuation stops at (h) in FIG. 89, which will be described later. That is, the production control device 300 can perform a countdown display from, for example, (2) in FIG. 88 to (1) in FIG. 89 until the time when the change stops, as a time suitable for the generation of the second start memory, and When the fluctuation stops at
0" can be displayed. At this time, the production control device 300 may appropriately increase the initial time of the countdown display so that the countdown continues even during the battle production. According to such an aspect, the countdown is performed even while the battle production is being performed in a specific production mode, and the player is given an appropriate time (period, timing) for the generation of the second starting memory. This makes it easier to store the second starting memory appropriately, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Although the performance control device 300 performs a countdown display until the fluctuation stops in (a) of FIG. 89, it may be configured to perform a countdown display until the timing when the normal power release in the time saving mode ends. In addition, in order to allow the player to quickly accumulate the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory), the countdown is displayed a predetermined time earlier than the step (h) in FIG. 89, for example, at the stage (a) in FIG. When the process is finished, the message "At 00:00" may be displayed.

When a battle performance is started as a specific performance, an ally character 767 and an enemy character 769 facing each other are displayed in the center of the display screen.

On the other hand, at the bottom of the display screen, a pending display 633g that is being consumed (changed) is displayed in a small size (small display of pending consumption, pending display while changing, display mode E). Also, next to the pending display 633g,
The occurrence standby display 672h is displayed in a small size (occurrence standby small display, display mode C).

Although the countdown display has stopped, if the player continues playing right-handed games,
It is possible to generate a second starting memory for the hold (remaining hold) to be consumed in the remaining hold extinguishment mode after the time saving mode.

( ) in FIG. 88 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second starting memory for remaining reservation occurs. When the second starting memory for remaining reservation occurs, the performance control device 300 performs the second starting memory generation performance (remaining reservation) as a performance to notify the generation of the second starting memory.

When the second starting memory generation effect (remaining hold) is performed, similarly to the second starting memory generation effect (time saving hold), for example, the hold display 633h corresponding to the second starting memory is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 while moving. It is displayed in a large size (display mode F), emphasizing that the second starting memory has occurred.

In addition, when the second starting memory for remaining reservation occurs, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory for time-saving reservation is being executed, so the reservation display 633h is shown in () of FIG. 88. As shown by the thin solid line, the display mode indicates that the item is on hold (standby hold) (display mode F)
. In addition, by generating the second start memory for remaining reservation, the number on the second reservation display section 630b changes to "
1”.

On the other hand, the pending display 633g that is being consumed is displayed in a small size on the left side of the bottom of the screen (small display of pending consumption, pending display that is being fluctuated, display mode E). Therefore, compared to the hold display 633h that is displayed large in the display mode F, the hold display 633g that is being consumed is displayed smaller in the display mode E, which is less noticeable. ) can be made easier to draw attention to.

Note that the second starting memory generation effect (remaining pending) may be displayed in a small size, for example, in the lower right corner of the display screen, to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the battle effect. Further, the second start memory generation effect (remaining pending) (() in FIG. 88) may be omitted and the screen may be transitioned from ((ne) to (()) in FIG. 88. Further, the production control device 300 stores the second starting memory for the remaining hold when the first half variation of the special symbol variation display game shown in FIG. If this occurs, a second starting memory occurrence performance (remaining pending) may be performed before the battle performance begins.

() in FIG. 88 is a display screen of the display device 41 when a movie effect (video effect) is subsequently executed as a battle effect.

Along with the time saving hold display 633g, the remaining hold display 633h is displayed in a small size at the bottom of the display screen (standby hold small display, display mode G). Then, the reservation display 633g, 633h during the period in which the second starting memory (special figure 2 reservation) cannot be increased in the subsequent specific production mode
is displayed smaller than the large symbol (pending display 633g, 633h<large symbol). Note that digested displays 673g and 673h, which will be described later in FIG. 89, are similarly displayed smaller than the large symbol (digested displays 673g and 673h<large symbol). Here, the period during which the second starting memory cannot be increased is a period during the time saving mode after the second starting memory reaches the upper limit value 1, or a period during which the general electricity is not released after the time saving mode ends.

In the center of the display screen of the display device 41, an ally character 767 and an enemy character 769 are displayed.
A battle performance in which the characters fight against each other is performed, and for example, a scene in which an enemy character 769 attacks an ally character 767 is displayed.

Next, (H) of FIG. 89 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory for time-saving hold has stopped changing.

When the special figure 2 variable display game stops changing, the large pattern in the variable display area 610 becomes ``16'', for example.
7" will be stopped and displayed. Similarly, the small design in the variable display area 615 is also similar to, for example, "
167" will be stopped and displayed.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, the pending display 633g that is being consumed (fluctuation) is hidden, and the consumed display 673g (display mode H) is displayed as shown by the broken line in (h) of FIG. Is displayed. That is, on the display screen, the display mode is such that the pending display 633g is switched to the consumed display 673g. The consumed display 673g is a display indicating that the second starting memory for time-saving suspension corresponding to the suspension display 633g has been consumed.

In addition, the production control device 300 maintains the display (display mode G) of the remaining hold display 633h (standby hold small display) on the right side of the consumed display 673g. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, no hold shift is performed, so even if the hold display 633g is exhausted, the position of the hold display 633h does not change. Here, the hold shift refers to the start memory that occurred earlier (time-saving hold) when a variable display game based on the standby hold (start memory that occurred later, remaining hold) is started on the display screen of the display device 41. ) was displayed in the predetermined display area (
This is an effect that moves the waiting hold to the hold expiration area related to the time-saving hold and the changing hold display area).

(F) of FIG. 89 is the display screen of the display device 41 after the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory for remaining reservation is started.

When the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory for remaining reservations is started, the specific performance mode switches from the time saving mode to the remaining reservation extinguishing mode, and a battle performance is displayed in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. It will be restarted. In the battle performance, for example, a scene in which an ally character 767 fights back against an enemy character 769 is displayed. Further, small symbols are displayed in a variable manner (“↓↓↓”) in a variable display area 615 displayed on the left side of the display screen.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, by starting the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, a pending display 633h for remaining pending is displayed as shown by the thick solid line in (f) of FIG. The pending display 633h (small display of pending consumption, pending display while changing, display mode E) is displayed. Further, the number on the special drawing 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "0".

In addition, even if a new remaining hold (excess hold) occurs while the hold display 633h for remaining hold is used up, the new remaining hold will not be displayed on the display screen, and the new remaining hold will not be displayed. The second starting memory generation effect (remaining hold) corresponding to this is also not performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the reservation is accumulated by the number of games of the special figure 2 variable display game played in the specific performance mode. Note that the second start memory that occurs after the end of the time saving state is treated as excessive suspension. In the third embodiment, the second half of the general power release pattern is eliminated (only the first half is released), so that basically no excessive reservation occurs, but when excessive reservation occurs, the normal The electrical release pattern may be designed so that not only the first half but also the second half is opened in one ordinary map (FIG. 56).

(f) of FIG. 89 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the battle is decided in the battle performance in the special figure 2 variable display game. For example, if ally character 767 wins,
The player can further increase his/her expectation that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game that is in progress will be a jackpot.

After that, (ho) in FIG. 89 shows the display device 4 when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped and displayed.
This is the display screen of No. 1.

The stop result of the second variable display game based on the second start memory for remaining hold is a jackpot (special result)
Then, the large symbol in the variable display area 610 and the small symbol in the variable display area 615 of the display screen are stopped and displayed in a special result mode (for example, "222").

In addition, as the second variable display game is stopped and displayed, the pending display 633h for remaining pending that is being used is hidden, and the completed display 673h (
Display mode H) is displayed. That is, on the display screen, the display mode is such that the pending display 633h is switched to the consumed display 673h. The consumed display 673h is a display indicating that the second starting memory for remaining reservation corresponding to the suspension display 633h has been consumed. Note that the digested indications 673h and 673g (display mode H) may be displayed in the same display mode as the small occurrence standby display 672h (occurrence standby small display, display mode C), or may be displayed in a different display mode. .

After that, the production control device 300 executes the fanfare production. Then, the gaming state changes to a jackpot state, and the player can play a jackpot game.

Note that the small display formats described in FIGS. 88 and 89 include the occurrence standby display 672h (display format C), the pending display 633g and 633h (display format E), and the pending display 633h for remaining reservations (display format G). ), and the digested indications 673g and 673h (display mode H) may be displayed in a hidden, translucent, or dark display mode.

Further, the display in these small display modes C, E, G, and H may be displayed in a layer lower (on the back, back side) than the layer in which the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the large displayed battle effect, second start memory generation effect, etc., thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Moreover, the display in these small display modes C, E, G, and H becomes a display smaller than the large pattern in the variable display area 610 (display mode C, E, G, H<large pattern).

On the other hand, the occurrence standby display 672g, 672h (display mode A), which is a large display mode, the second
Hold display 633g (display mode B) of starting memory generation effect (time saving hold), hold display 6 during consumption
33g (display mode D), and the pending display 633h (display mode F) of the second starting memory generation effect (remaining pending) are displayed larger than the large symbol in the variable display area 610 (large symbol < display mode A, B, D, F).

Furthermore, along with the display on the display device 41, the special figure 2 reservation display 55 (
LED) and the lamp display parts 5 and 6 (LED) of the fourth symbol display device (lamp display device 80),
A waiting display or a completed display may be performed. For example, if the pending display is displayed in a lighting mode, the LE
It is possible to display the occurrence standby and the completed display without increasing D.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the gaming control device 100 can store up to one second start memory that has occurred, but even if it can store up to four, that is, if up to four remaining reservations occur. However, the performance control device 300 can similarly perform generation standby display, consumption completed display, and second start memory generation performance on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, prepare four displays 672h, 633h, 673h, etc. related to remaining reservations, or display 672h related to remaining reservations.
, 633h, 673h, etc. are prepared one by one, and 1 to 4 remaining reservations are displayed together.

In addition, when up to four remaining reservations occur, the two LEDs of the batch display device 50 or the fourth symbol display are used to display one pending reservation and one to four stored ones. and pending. In this case, the pending holds are displayed together, but only 1
If there is even one, the LED for displaying the pending hold status lights up. In addition, when performing a hold display using 5 LEDs instead of 2 LEDs, the 5 LEDs are used to indicate that the hold is being used.
(1 piece) and (4 pieces) for displaying hold status during standby.

[Example of screen transition in time saving state when occurrence standby display and non-occurrence effect of second start memory are performed]
With reference to FIG. 90, the display mode in the time saving state when the occurrence standby display and non-occurrence effect of the second start memory are performed will be described. Note that in the following description, the same contents as those in FIGS. 88 and 89 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 90 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and the screen transition in the time saving state when the second start memory generation standby display and non-occurrence effect are performed. This is an example.

(a) in FIG. 90 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state changes to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (after the round game), and is the same as (a) in FIG. 88.

In (a) of FIG. 88, the display screen transitions to (b) of FIG. 88 due to the generation of the second start memory for the hold that is consumed during the time saving (time saving hold), but in FIG. As a result of the second starting memory for time-saving hold not occurring during the state, the specific effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game related to the starting memory is omitted, and the display screen is shown in (ya) in FIG. Screen transition.

Assuming that the second start memory for time-saving hold does not occur during the time-saving state, after entering the time-saving state and before a game ball enters the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general electricity), the time-saving end condition is not set as the second condition. There are cases where the first condition is satisfied. The first condition is a predetermined transition condition from the time-saving condition, in which the total number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game and special figure 2 fluctuation display game) in a specific gaming state is the time-saving number ((second The second condition is satisfied when the first number of times (for example, 10 times) is greater than the number of times (for example, 1 time), and the time is shortened. This is true when the 2-variable display game is executed the number of times the time is shortened (the second time (for example, once)).In this embodiment, the number of times the time is shortened (the second time) is 1, so the second condition is satisfied. , when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed once, it is established immediately and ends in a short time.Therefore, the first condition is that the special figure 1 variable display game is not executed and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed once. This is a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the game is played the first time (for example, 10 times).In this way, by executing the special figure 1 variable display game for the first time (10th time), the time-saving state is As a result, the second starting memory for time-saving hold cannot be generated.In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (normal pattern gate) When the fluctuating display game hits a regular symbol, the regular symbol is released, and during the time saving state, the regular symbol hit is more likely to occur.Also, the special symbol fluctuating display game (the special symbol 1 fluctuating display game and the special symbol) When the total number of executions (Fig. 2 variable display game) reaches a predetermined number (for example, when it reaches the 1st number (10th time) or the 1st number - 1 (9th time)), the special figure 1 variable display A countdown display (for example, displaying "At 06:97") may also be displayed while the game is running.Incidentally, the number of times saved (the second number (one time in this embodiment)) is counted down. It may also be displayed together with the display. According to such an aspect, it is possible to easily make the player recognize how long the time (period, timing) suitable for the generation of the second starting memory is. This makes it easier to store money appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

() in FIG. 90 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second start memory for time-saving hold is not generated.

If the second start memory for time-saving hold does not occur, the production control device 300 hides the occurrence standby display 672g (large occurrence standby display, display mode A) for time-saving hold, and non-occurrence display 67
4g (display mode I) is displayed. That is, on the display screen, the display mode is such that the occurrence standby display 672g for saving time is switched to the non-occurrence display 674g.

Further, when the non-occurrence display 674g is displayed, the characters "Preparing" at the top left of the display screen are switched to a countdown display (for example, "At 06:97"). In addition, there is a second
Since the start memory is in a state where generation is possible, the generation standby display 672h is maintained as it is. After that, if the second start memory for remaining hold is not generated (for example, in a specification that can generate excessive hold by opening the second half of the general power line as shown in Fig. 56, the period of opening the second half of the general power line has passed) case), the display screen changes to (y) in FIG. In addition, when the second starting memory for remaining reservation occurs, the second starting memory generation effect (remaining reservation) is performed as shown in the display screen ( ) of FIG. 88, and the transition to the remaining reservation extinguishing mode is performed. I can do it.

Cases in which the second starting memory for remaining reservations does not occur are when the time-saving state ends without the general power line being released, or when the general power line is released in the time-saving state but the game ball is closed without winning and even after that. An example of this is a situation where it cannot be reopened. In such a case, it becomes impossible to generate the second starting memory for remaining reservation. For example, if a predetermined number of times (the 10th) special symbol 1 variable display game ends without the general electricity being released, the second starting memory for remaining reservation cannot be generated.

(Y) in FIG. 90 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the second starting memory for not only the time-saving hold but also the remaining hold is not generated.

When the second start memory for remaining reservation does not occur, the production control device 300 hides the occurrence standby display 672h for remaining reservation and displays a non-occurrence display 674h. That is, on the display screen, the display mode is such that the occurrence standby display 672h for remaining reservation is switched to the non-occurrence display 674h, and the non-occurrence displays 674g and 674h are respectively displayed in the center of the display screen. Therefore, if the number of second starting memories does not reach the planned number in a specific production mode, the non-occurrence display 67
At least one of 4g and 674h will be displayed. Therefore, it is now possible to notify the player that the number of games has decreased, which prevents misidentification of the number of games in the specific production mode, and also provides a warning to the player to prevent the number of games from decreasing next time. can be called attention to in different ways.

Thereafter, the production mode does not change to the remaining reservation consumption mode but becomes the normal game mode, and the game state returns from the time saving state to the normal game state. In addition, when the second starting memory for remaining reservation does not occur, the production control device 300 may switch to the normal game mode without displaying the non-occurrence display 674h. That is, the screen transition shown in (y) in FIG. 90 may be omitted.

In addition, even if the second starting memory for remaining reservation does not occur after the time-saving reservation display 633g is displayed, the production control device 300 can display the non-occurrence display 674h.
That is, a non-occurrence display 674h is displayed on the display screen together with a time-saving hold display 633g. Further, although the production control device 300 displays the non-occurrence displays 674g and 674h in a large display mode in the center of the display screen (display mode I), they may be displayed in a small size at the bottom of the display screen.

[Example of screen transition in jackpot symbol candidate display performance]
With reference to FIG. 91, the display mode when the candidate display performance of the jackpot symbol (special result mode, special result mode) is performed will be described.

FIG. 91 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the candidate display performance of the jackpot symbol.

For example, after the battle is settled by the battle performance in (f) of FIG. 89, the production control device 300 may change the special figure 2 variable display game to the figure without stopping and displaying it, as shown in (h) of FIG. 89. As shown in No. 91 (Ho 2), it is also possible to develop the effect to a so-called full rotation reach while keeping the special figure 2 variable display game fluctuating. Full rotation reach is a type of reach state, and is a state in which a variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas 610 while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete.

(Ho 2) in FIG. 91 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the big symbol in the variable display area 610 is temporarily stopped at a jackpot symbol (for example, "222") in the special figure 2 variable display game. .

By temporarily stopping the big symbol at a jackpot symbol (for example, "222"), the performance control device 300 can further enhance the player's expectation that the special symbol 2 variable display game being executed will become a jackpot. Incidentally, the large symbol may be changed at a low speed without temporarily stopping.

(Ma) in FIG. 91 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the candidate display performance of the jackpot symbol is started.

When the performance control device 300 executes the jackpot symbol candidate display performance, a candidate display 675 that displays jackpot symbol candidates side by side is displayed at the top of the display screen of the display device 41.

In the candidate display 675, as shown in (ma) of FIG. 91, all symbols 1 to 7 are displayed as symbols that have a possibility of becoming a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot symbol (for example, "7"), which makes the gaming state more advantageous when a jackpot (special result) is achieved, has a special color or pattern as shown by the hatching in (ma) of FIG. May be attached. For jackpot symbols that are advantageous, for example, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the stop symbol number can be set to a large value. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot with the advantageous jackpot symbol, the player can play a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, and can improve the interest of the game. Note that the advantageous jackpot symbol is not limited to "7", but may be other symbols such as odd number symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7"), for example.

Further, when a jackpot is achieved with an advantageous jackpot symbol, a large value (for example, 99 times) may be set to the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of changes in time reduction). As another aspect, when a jackpot is achieved with an advantageous jackpot symbol, the specific gaming state may be set to a variable probability state in which the jackpot probability is high, instead of the time saving state.

The variable display area 610 is displayed slightly below the center of the display screen so as not to obstruct the visibility of the candidate display 675, and a full rotation reach with a large symbol is performed. In addition, the production control device 300 enlarges and displays a variable display of at least a part of the plurality of variable display areas 610 (for example, the middle area 610C) so that it is emphasized that a full rotation reach is being performed. It's okay.

(M) and (M) in FIG. 91 are the display screens of the display device 41 when the jackpot symbols are being narrowed down by the jackpot symbol candidate display performance. While the candidate display performance of the jackpot symbol is being executed, the full rotation reach with the big symbol continues to be performed in the variable display area 610.

In the candidate display 675, as shown in FIG. 91 (only), an "x" is added to numbers (for example, "5" and "3") that are excluded from the candidate display of jackpot symbols. Note that numbers that have already been excluded from the candidate display of jackpot symbols (for example, "4" and "2") are hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(m), the numbers (for example, "5", "3") excluded from the candidate display of jackpot symbols are hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. In addition,
In the variable display area 610, the full rotation reach with large symbols continues. Therefore, by visually recognizing how the numbers indicating candidates for the jackpot symbol in the candidate display 675 are limited (for example, "6", "7", "1"), the player can increase his or her expectations for the jackpot. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. By displaying jackpot symbol candidates in this way,
It is possible to show the player which symbols there is a possibility that the game will stop, and it is possible to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, if the display mode of advantageous jackpot symbols changes, or if symbols that are unlikely to stop when narrowing down the candidates are deleted from the candidate display 675, it is possible to determine which symbols are likely to stop. This can be shown to the player, and the effect can be easily understood by the player.

Thereafter, the candidates for the jackpot symbol in the candidate display 675 are changed to include, for example, "6" and "1", which are excluded from the candidate display, so that the jackpot symbol that makes the gaming state more advantageous when a jackpot (special result) occurs. Narrowed down to 7. Therefore, by displaying jackpot symbol candidates that have no possibility of stopping forever, it is possible to prevent players from misperceiving that the performance corresponding to the variable display game is still continuing, and it is possible to notify jackpot symbols in an easy-to-understand manner. . Note that the jackpot symbol candidate display performance is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 91, and may be performed in other modes. Production control device 3
For example, 00 may perform a jackpot symbol candidate presentation in the manner of spinning a roulette wheel (roulette presentation).

Part (4) of FIG. 91 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the performance after the jackpot symbol candidates have been narrowed down to the advantageous jackpot symbol "7" is displayed.

After the jackpot symbol candidates on the candidate display 675 are narrowed down to "7", the performance control device 300 performs a performance of displaying a spark (explosion)-like effect 676, for example, as shown in (m) of FIG. 91. The effect 676 can advertise information regarding the model, manufacturer, etc. to the player by displaying large letters (for example, the initial "so") related to the model, manufacturer, etc., for example. Also, information about the model, manufacturer, etc. will be displayed just before the jackpot.
This can be seen by players who have high expectations for winning the jackpot, making it easier for them to have a good impression, so the advertising effect can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that if the candidate jackpot symbol is other than "7" (an advantageous jackpot symbol), it may be switched to "7" during the performance.

In (also) of FIG. 91, the full rotation reach is completed, the stop result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot (special result), and the large symbol in the variable display area 610 and the small symbol in the variable display area 615 are a jackpot. This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the game stops at the symbol "777" (special result mode).
As mentioned above, "777" is a stop symbol suggested by "7" as the candidate for the jackpot symbol in the candidate display 675, and is a jackpot symbol that makes the gaming state more advantageous when it becomes a jackpot (special result). .

After that, the production control device 300 executes the fanfare production. Then, the gaming state changes to a jackpot state, and the player can play a jackpot game.

[Example of screen transition in a fanfare production using a movable accessory (transparent member) and the movable accessory]
With reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, a movable accessory (transparent member) and a display mode when a fanfare performance is performed using the movable accessory will be described.

FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 93 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition when the movable member 677 operates.

As shown in FIG. 92, the game board 30 according to the third embodiment is provided with a movable member 677 (transparent accessory) above the display screen of the display device 41.

The movable member 677 includes a window made of transparent glass or plastic through which the rear (back) can be seen, and a frame surrounding the window, and can move up and down. Movable member 6
77 can be positioned in front of the display screen of the display device 41 as described later in FIG. 93 by descending from the initial position shown in FIG. Further, at that time, the player can visually check the display screen at the rear through the window of the movable member 677.

FIG. 93(a) shows the display device when the stop result of the special figure 2 variable display game is "222" (special result) as shown in FIG. 89(ho), and the fanfare effect is started. This is the display screen of No. 41. Note that when the fanfare performance is started from a jackpot with another symbol (for example, a jackpot with "777" as shown in FIG. 91), a transition to a similar display screen can be made.

With the start of the fanfare performance, the display screen of the display device 41 displays (ra) in FIG.
As shown in the figure, the effect is performed after the ally character 767 wins. In FIG. 93(a), for example, a saturated line effect is drawn on the ally character 767 to make it easier to attract the player's attention, but by drawing the ally character 767 large, the player's It may be possible to make it easier to attract attention. Note that, as long as the ally character 767 stands out, the production control device 300 can display not only the concentrated line effect but also other effects. For example, the effect control device 300 may display a spark (explosion)-like effect, a lightning-like effect, etc. as other effects.

Further, with the start of the fanfare performance, the movable member 677 is lowered from the initial position so as to be located in front of the display screen of the display device 41. At that time, the portion of the display screen of the display device 41 that corresponds to the rear of the movable member 677 is hidden. For example, in FIG. 93(a), the concentrated line effect displayed on the display screen is hidden at a position overlapping the movable member 677, and the screen area of the display screen that can be viewed through the movable member 677 is The screen is in a dimmed state (dark state, for example, black display).

FIG. 93(R) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the movable member 677 is lowered and positioned in front of the display screen of the display device 41.

On the display screen of the display device 41, a saturated line effect is displayed at positions that do not overlap with the movable member 677, and on the other hand, at positions where the movable member 677 overlaps, the effect of the friendly character 76 is displayed.
A character rendering of a mode in which 7 and another ally character 768 meet is displayed.

Therefore, the player can visually recognize the character performance displayed on the display screen via the transparent movable member 677. In this way, the effect control device 300 displays effects on the movable member 677 to the player by displaying independent effects on the display screen of the display device 41 at a position overlapping with the movable member 677 and a position not overlapping with the movable member 677. It is possible to create the illusion that it is happening. As a result, even if the movable member 677 is not provided with a display device, by displaying an effect that overlaps with the movable member 677, it is possible to reduce the device cost and provide a surprising effect for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

FIG. 93(a) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the movable member 677 rises and returns to the initial position above the display screen of the display device 41.

On the display screen of the display device 41, the character performance displayed at a position overlapping with the movable member 677 progresses, and an ally character 767 and another ally character 768 approach each other. In addition, in accordance with the movement of the movable member 677, the screen area on the display screen where the character presentation is performed also shifts upward.

The upper part of the movable member 677 is located above the display screen, and the ally character 767 and another ally character 768 displayed on the display screen are separated at the top (head side, face side) (
displayed in a truncated manner. In this way, the character performance displayed on the display screen continues to be displayed at a position overlapping the movable member 677 even when the movable member 677 returns to the initial position.

In addition, the effect of the concentrated line that was displayed at a position that does not overlap with the movable member 677 in (R) and (R) of FIG. 93, when the movable member 677 returns to the initial position as shown in It is also displayed at a position overlapping the movable member 677. Therefore, at the position overlapping the movable member 677 on the display screen, both the character presentation and the saturated line effect are displayed. In addition, after the victory, the ally character 76 that was displayed in the position where the concentration line is concentrated
7 ((ra) in FIG. 93) may be displayed when the movable member 677 returns to the initial position, or may be hidden as shown in (r) in FIG. 93.

93 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the movable member 677 returns to the initial position.

On the display screen of the display device 41, since there is no screen area overlapping the movable member 677, the character performance becomes invisible. Note that the saturated line effect is displayed as is. Then, when the fanfare performance ends and the game state changes to a jackpot state, the player can play a jackpot game.

As mentioned above, the third embodiment has been explained, but if the small hit probability is not 1/8 but an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1 (=100%)), the special figure 2 variable display game will win. Pattern B on the pattern of
- In addition to G, a symbol J (see the fifth embodiment) may also be provided. Then, the number of times of time reduction after a jackpot is set to 0 for the symbol J, and the state is changed to a transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) or a normal game state after the jackpot, so that the time reduction does not occur after the jackpot. That is, in the specific game state shown in FIG. 54A, when the symbol J hits, the state changes to a transition state (remaining hold consumption mode), and further in the transition state, when the symbol J hits, the game state transitions to the normal game state. Further, in the third embodiment, the time-saving state may be replaced with a variable probability state.

[Actions and effects of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes games (variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game),
Special figure 2 variable display game) (display device 41). In the gaming machine 10, the game control means can generate a specific gaming state (time-saving state) as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the performance control means can generate a specific performance mode (time-saving mode or The subsequent remaining reservation consumption mode) can be started, and the display means displays a display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory (time saving reservation, remaining reservation), special drawing 2 reservation) that can be generated in the specific production mode. First display mode (large occurrence standby display 672
g, 672h, occurrence standby large display, display mode A), and then a display corresponding to the starting memory that actually occurred in a specific production mode is displayed in the second display mode (hold display 633g, 633h, digestion pending small display, It can be displayed in the following ways: Floating hold display, display mode E, standby hold small display, display mode G).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the display allows the player to easily grasp how many starting memories should be generated in a specific production mode or the number of variable display games to be executed in a specific production mode. Since the game can be changed in various ways, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming control means (gaming control device 100) is configured to control a specific production mode (
Games (fluctuating display games (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)) related to multiple starting memories (second starting memory, special figure 2 pending)) can be executed sequentially, and the display means (display control means) displays the starting memory (remaining pending) that occurred earlier when the game related to the starting memory (remaining pending) that occurred later is started during a specific performance mode.
Do not move the display of the starting memory (remaining hold) that occurred later to the position where ``time saving hold'' was displayed (do not shift hold).

According to such a gaming machine 10, by not performing a hold shift, the player can control the number of starting memories to be generated in a specific production mode or the number of games (variable) to be executed in a specific production mode. This makes it easier to understand the number of displayed games. Therefore, the specifications of the game (game) in a specific performance mode can be easily communicated to the player, allowing the player to play the game appropriately and execute the performance intended by the producer, which improves the interest of the game. can be done.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the display means (display device 41) displays the number of games that can be executed during the specific performance mode (starting memory generation When excessive starting memory (excessive hold, second remaining hold, excessive remaining hold) exceeds the scheduled number (planned number), the excess starting memory is not displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can easily grasp the number of games (the number of variable display games) to be executed in a specific presentation mode (excluding the excessive reservation mode for extinguishing excessive reservations). Similarly, it is possible to play an appropriate game, perform the performance intended by the creator, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the performance control means (performance control device 300) is configured to control a specific performance mode (
When the starting memory (second starting memory (time saving holding, remaining holding), special map 2 holding) that can be generated in the time saving mode or the subsequent remaining holding extinguishing mode becomes impossible, the start that can no longer be generated. It is possible to omit a specific effect corresponding to a game related to memory (special figure variable display game, variable display game), and the display means (display device 41) becomes incapable of generating when a specific effect is omitted. The third display mode (non-occurrence display 674g, 674h (display mode I)) corresponds to the starting memory.
It can be displayed in

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the second starting memory does not reach the scheduled number in a specific performance mode, the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, it is now possible to notify the player that the number of games has decreased, which prevents misidentification of the number of games in the specific production mode, and also provides a warning to the player to prevent the number of games from decreasing next time. can be called attention to in different ways.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the display means (display device 41) displays all the start-up memories that can occur in the specific production mode when the specific production mode (time saving mode and subsequent remaining hold consumption mode) is started. A display corresponding to is displayed in the first display mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the number of starting memories to be generated in a specific production mode in a specific gaming state (time saving state) and the number of games to be executed in a specific production mode (number of variable display games) can be determined. Furthermore, since the information can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the display means (display device 41) displays the starting memory (second starting memory (time saving hold, remaining hold), special figure 2
On hold) related games (variable display games (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
) is completed, the display corresponding to the starting memory is changed to the fourth display mode (digested display 673g,
673h (display mode H)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, in a specific gaming state (time saving state), it becomes easy to grasp how much of each reservation has been used up, and it is easy for the player to grasp how many games have been executed in a specific production mode. This can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a game control means capable of executing a game based on the starting memory, a performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game, and a display means capable of displaying the performance (for example). . The game control means is capable of generating a specific game state as a game state advantageous to the player, and the performance control means is capable of starting a specific performance mode in the specific game state, and starts in the specific performance mode. An indication indicating that the period is suitable for memory generation can be displayed on the display means.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can be made aware of a period suitable for generating a starting memory (i.e., a period during which the player wants to accumulate starting memories), and the player can appropriately accumulate starting memories. Since it becomes easier to play the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means (game control device 100) can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state) as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory, The first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) can be executed as a game based on the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game can be executed as a game based on the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 pending). A variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed as a game, and the total number of times of the first variable display game and the second variable display game during the specific game state is the first number of times (time saving number)
or the number of second variable display games during the specific game state is a second condition.
When either of the second conditions equal to the number of times is satisfied, the specific gaming state is ended.

In a specific game state, the original specifications (performance) of the gaming machine 10 are such that the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), which is the main variable display game, can be executed the number of time-saving times (second number). As shown in FIG. 1 variable display game) is executed, the gaming machine 10 deviates from its original specifications. However, by setting multiple conditions such as the first condition and the second condition, the execution of the secondary variable display game (first variable display game) can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the original specifications can be maintained without causing any loss to the player. You can play the game with. This can increase the interest of the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 104. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment adds a time-saving mode (time-saving state, general electricity support state) regarding the special symbol 1 variable display game after the remaining reservation of the special symbol 2 is used up to the first embodiment.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 94 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a modified version of the game state transition diagram of FIG. 54A of the first embodiment, and the differences from FIG. 54A will be mainly described below.

In FIG. 94, the specific gaming state in FIG. 54A is defined as specific gaming state A (first specific gaming state), and the transition state in FIG. 54A is defined as specific gaming state B (second specific gaming state). Specific gaming state A
In this case, due to public electricity support, special map 2 reservations are likely to occur, resulting in a time-saving state. In the specific gaming state B, the remaining reservation of the special drawing 2 is exhausted after the end of the specific gaming state A, and a time-saving state is entered in which the special drawing 1 holding is more likely to occur due to the general electricity support. In addition, the time-saving state in which special drawing 1 reservation is likely to occur is when the special drawing 1 starting prize opening 36 is connected to the first opening/closing member 164 (opening/closing member A), which will be described later.
This is realized by -2.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is a special figure 2 priority variation (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment) in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, in specific gaming state B, first, the remaining reservation of special symbol 2 is used up and the special symbol 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and then the special symbol 1 pending that occurred in specific gaming state B is used up. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the main variable display game. In specific game state B, which is a time-saving state, the special figure 2 variable display game (
After all the second games) are completed, the special figure 1 variable display game (first game) is executed in a shorter time than the normal game state. This gives the player a chance and improves the interest of the game. For example, the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter in specific gaming state B than in the normal game state, or the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that in the normal game state in specific gaming state B. It is shorter than the shortest variation time (shortest special figure 1 variation time) in the state. In addition, as will be described later, in the specific game state B, the special figure 2 hold does not occur because the game ball does not pass through the starting port 2 switch 37a.

In both specific gaming state A (first specific gaming state) and specific gaming state B (second specific gaming state), the gaming control device 100 has a low probability of jackpot probability, but a high probability of winning a common symbol. (normal pattern high probability). In specific game states A and B, as the firing mode of the game ball, right-handed hitting aiming at the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the first opening/closing member 164 and second opening/closing member 168 described later is recommended. In addition, depending on the high probability of the normal game, as described later, the specific game state A
In this case, the general power support for generating the special figure 2 hold is executed, and in the specific game state B, the general power support for generating the special figure 1 hold is executed.

Since the specific gaming state A is likely to be repeated when the small winning probability is high (for example, repeated X times), the performance mode of the specific gaming state A is set to a loop mode (X times loop mode). The production mode of the specific game state B is the remaining pending consumption & time saving mode. Furthermore, if the remaining pending consumption & time saving mode is divided into the remaining pending consumption mode and the subsequent time saving mode, the player can understand that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variable display game in the remaining pending consumption mode and the special feature in the time saving mode. It becomes easy to understand that the variable display game in FIG. 1 is the main variable display game. In addition, if it is not divided, the same effect will be executed through the remaining pending use and time saving mode, and it will be easy to understand that the probability of normal drawing is high through the remaining pending use and time saving mode. Further, in this embodiment, the remaining reservation extinguishing mode does not need to be divided into a mode before the end of normal power release and a mode after the end of normal power power release. The production mode (production stage) during the stay may be displayed in text or as a background on the display screen of the display device 41.

Further, the specific game state A and the specific game state B may be combined into an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the performance mode may be the same without being separated. In this case, the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming state B, which are advantageous states, can be made into a common performance mode. If a special figure hit occurs in specific gaming state B (a jackpot by passing V during a small hit), the gaming value given to the player will be higher than if a special figure hit occurred in specific gaming state A. If it is made larger, a large gaming value can be obtained even though it is unclear whether it is specific gaming state A or specific gaming state B from the common performance mode, and the player can be pleased. Note that here, the gaming value (privilege) is the number of times saved after the jackpot ends, the number of jackpots finally obtained, the upper limit of the number of rounds, etc.

Next, transitions from each gaming state will be explained. In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (probability of occurrence of a jackpot due to passing V during a small hit)
The case where is 1/8 (=12.5%) will be explained, but as will be described later, the small hit probability may be other probabilities. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 variable display game (small hit probability = 0). Also, a case will be explained in which the jackpot probability (not the jackpot due to V passing) in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is 1/300.
In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game, a configuration in which the jackpot probability = 0 and no jackpot occurs is also possible.

First, in the normal gaming state, when a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the winning symbol A will transition to the specific gaming state A after the jackpot state ends, and the winning symbol M will transition to the specific gaming state A. After the jackpot state ends, a transition is made to a specific game state B, and with the winning symbol K, the game returns to the normal game state after the jackpot state ends. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 hold does not occur and the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed.

In specific gaming state A, when a jackpot (jackpot due to passing V during a small hit) occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, in the winning symbol P, after the jackpot state ends, specific gaming state A (
Returning to the time saving mode #1), in the winning symbol Q, after the jackpot state ends, a transition is made to the specific game state B. Although it is omitted in FIG. 94 because it rarely occurs, in specific game state A,
When a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the winning symbol A returns to the specific gaming state A (time saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends, just like the symbol P, and the winning symbol In M, like symbol Q, a transition is made to a specific gaming state B after the jackpot state ends.

Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a transition is made from the specific gaming state A to the specific gaming state B. For example, the predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific gaming state A reaches the time saving number (first predetermined number of times, for example, 5 times), or (ii)
A second predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions) in which the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game) in the specific game state A is greater than the time reduction number (first predetermined number of times). (twice as much as Note that if the player plays the game normally, the transition occurs when condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that condition (ii) is met.

In specific gaming state B, when a jackpot (jackpot due to passing V during a small hit) occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, in the winning symbol G, after the jackpot state ends, specific gaming state A (
The game changes to the time saving mode #2), and returns to the specific game state B after the jackpot state ends in the winning symbol Q. Although it is omitted in FIG. 94 because it rarely occurs, in specific game state B, when a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs in the special pattern 2 variable display game, the winning symbol R is the same as symbol G. After the jackpot state ends, the game changes to a specific game state A (time saving mode #2), and in the winning symbol M, like the symbol Q, after the jackpot state ends, it returns to the specific game state B.

In specific gaming state B, after all the special figure 2 variable display games based on remaining reserves are completed or when there are no remaining reserves to begin with, a special figure 1 variable display game based on special figure 1 pending that occurred in specific gaming state B. Therefore, when a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs, the winning symbol A transitions to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends, and the winning symbol M transitions to a specific game state after the jackpot state ends. The state returns to state B, and with the winning symbol K, the state transitions to the normal game state after the jackpot state ends. It should be noted that when a jackpot occurs due to the special drawing 1 variable display game based on the special drawing 1 suspension that occurred in the specific game state B, a configuration is also possible in which the state transitions to the time saving mode #2 after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, in the specific game state B, the number of variations in the special figure 1 is a third predetermined number (time saving number, for example 9
9 times), or the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) in specific game state B is greater than the time saving number (for example, the third predetermined number of times). + specified remaining number of reservations = 103 times), the game may transition to the normal gaming state.

[Time saving number and specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the pattern]
FIG. 95 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations), etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game. The symbol is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either the stop symbol number or the stop symbol pattern.

FIG. 95(A) is related to the winning symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game. Figure 95 (B
) The upper figure is related to the winning symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game during the loop mode (in the specific gaming state A), and the lower figure is related to the winning symbols in the remaining pending consumption & time saving mode (in the specific gaming state B). This relates to the winning symbols (winning symbols in the remaining reserve) of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this embodiment, the symbols A, K, M, and R are, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers (A2910)
It is a jackpot stop symbol determined by. In this embodiment, the symbols G, P, and Q are, for example, small-hit stop symbols determined by the small-hit symbol random number (A2911). In addition,
Since a V prize is guaranteed to occur during a small hit, as in the first embodiment, the symbols G, P, Q
may be determined by the jackpot symbol random number (A2910).

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 18) is changed as follows. If the jackpot flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the small hit pattern random number is loaded from the special drawing 2 small winning pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4102), and the special drawing A 2-bit winning symbol table is set (A4103), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small winning symbol random number is obtained and saved in the RWM special symbol 2-stop symbol number area (A4104).
Then, the special figure 2 small hit stop symbol information table is set (A4105), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106).

The jackpot symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game have a distribution (selection rate) of 34%, 46%,
The symbols A, K, and M are 20%. Special figure 2 during loop mode (specific gaming state A)
The jackpot symbols of the variable display game are symbols A and M with distributions of 34% and 66%, respectively, and the small winning symbols are symbols P and Q with distributions of 34% and 66%, respectively. Note that the distribution of the symbols A and M may be different from the distribution of the symbols P and Q. The jackpot symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game during the remaining pending consumption and time saving mode (in specific game state B) (the winning symbols in the remaining pending) are symbols R and M with distributions of 34% and 66%, respectively. The small winning symbols are symbols G and Q with distributions of 34% and 66%, respectively. Note that the distribution of the symbols R and M may be different from the distribution of the symbols G and Q.

For symbols A and P, which are the winning types, the number of time reductions related to the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot is one time, and the specified remaining reserved number (special figure 2) is 4. Therefore, the total number of time reductions and remaining reservations is 5 (=1+
4) Become. In addition, here, the upper limit values (A2905 in FIG. 9) of the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) and the special figure 2 reserve number (special figure 2 start memory number) are both 4. Further, in order to make the game more varied, the number of time reductions and the prescribed number of remaining reservations may be different between the jackpot symbol A and the small win symbol P.

In symbol K, which is the type of hit, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 0, and the specified remaining number of reservations (special figure 2 The number of pending items) is 0. Therefore, the total number of time reductions and the number of remaining reservations is 0 by default.

For symbol M, which is the winning type, in the case of a hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the specified remaining number of reserved symbols (special symbol 2 reserved number) that is consumed after the end of the normal gaming state is 0. , and the number of time reductions related to the special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the normal game state is 99 times. The total number of time reductions and remaining reservations is 99 by default.

In addition, in the symbols M and Q, in the case of a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game in the loop mode (specific gaming state A), the specified remaining reserved number (special figure 2) that can be used up after the end of the loop mode (time saving state) 2 pending number) is 4, and the number of time reductions related to the special figure 1 variable display game after loop mode is 9.
9 times. The total number of time reductions and remaining reservations is 103 by default. In addition, in order to make the game rich in variety, the number of time reductions and the prescribed number of remaining reservations may be different between the jackpot symbol M and the small win symbol Q.

Furthermore, in symbols M and Q, if you win the special symbol 2 variable display game in the remaining hold extinguishment & time saving mode (specific game state B), the specified remaining hold that can be extinguished in the remaining hold extinguishment mode entered again. The number is the existing number of reserved special symbols 2 at that time, m, and the number of time reductions related to the special symbol 1 variable display game after the remaining reserved consumption mode is 99 times. According to the regulations, the total number of shortened hours and the number of remaining reservations is 9.
It becomes 9+m.

For symbols R and G, which are the winning types, the number of time reductions regarding the special symbol 2 variable display game after the jackpot is 99, and the specified remaining number of symbols is 4. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 103. In addition, in order to make the game rich in variety, the number of time reductions and the prescribed number of remaining reservations may be different between the jackpot symbol R and the small win symbol G. For symbols R and G, the continuation rate is approximately 100% and the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0% for a small hit probability of 1/8. Therefore, for symbols R and G, after the jackpot ends,
A transition to time saving mode #2 (determined mode) is made to ensure a jackpot again and the specific game state (time saving state) continues thereafter. On the other hand, for symbols R and G, the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0%, and most of the time is a transition from time-saving mode #2 in specific gaming state A to time-saving mode #1 through a jackpot.

If time saving mode #1 and remaining hold consumption mode are used as the same effect mode and the same effect is executed, it will be difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving mode of special drawing 2 and the remaining holding consumption of special drawing 2, and the player will not be able to hit the jackpot with the remaining holding. It will be surprising if a large gaming value (99 time saving times) can be obtained, and the interest in the game will increase.

As mentioned above, depending on the game state (performance mode) and the type of winning symbol, you can change the number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations after the jackpot ends, expanding the range of game specifications and playability. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Special figure display processing]
FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the special figure display process according to the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same step numbers will be given to the same processes as the special figure display process (FIG. 25A) of the first embodiment, and the description will be omitted.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (the result of A5004 is "N"), and if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loser (the result of A5011 is "N"), the number of time reduction variations is A time reduction variation number update process (A5004a) is executed to update the number of changes (A5004a), and a performance mode information check process regarding the setting of the performance mode is executed (A5004b).

[Time reduction variation number update process]
FIG. 96B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations according to the fourth embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 updates the total number of time reduction changes by -1 (subtracts by 1), which is the total number of time reduction changes in the special figure change display game (the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game). ) (A5200a). Note that the initial value of the total number of time reduction fluctuations (for example, the second predetermined number of times, the third predetermined number of times + the prescribed number of remaining reservations) is the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (step A640).
9 and A5202b) described below.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the total time reduction variation number has become 0 (
A5200b). When the total time reduction variation number is 0 (A5200b result is "Y")
In other words, if the time saving state ends in this special figure fluctuation display game, step A52
03-A5209 Execute the processing at the end of time saving. If the total time reduction variation count is not 0 (the result of A5200b is "N"), it is determined whether or not the current state is specific gaming state A (loop mode) (A5200c). Whether or not the current mode is loop mode can be determined from, for example, the production mode number.

When the game control device 100 is not in the specific game state A (loop mode), (A5200c
(the result is "N"), the process moves to step A5200e. Specific gaming state A (loop mode)
If so (the result of A5200c is "Y"), it is determined whether or not what was executed this time is the variation of special figure 1 (A5200d). If what was executed this time was the variation of special map 1 (A52
00d result is "Y"), step A520 is executed without updating the time reduction variation number by -1.
Move to 2.

On the other hand, if what was executed this time is not the variation of special map 1 (the result of A5200d is "N"),
That is, when what has been executed this time is the variation of special drawing 2, it is determined whether or not the current state is specific game state B (remaining pending consumption & time saving mode) (A5200e). If it is not the specific gaming state B (the result of A5200e is "N"), the process moves to step A5201.

When the game control device 100 is in a specific game state B (remaining pending use & time saving mode),
5200e result is "Y"), determine whether or not what was executed this time is the variation of special map 2 (
A5200f). If what was executed this time was not the variation of special map 2 (the result of A5200f was
N''), that is, if what was executed this time is the variation of special figure 1, the number of time reduction variations is -
1 is updated (A5201), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become 0 (A5202).
). On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes (A52
If the result of 00f is "Y"), the time reduction variation count is not updated by -1 and the process moves to step A5202.

The number of time reduction fluctuations in specific gaming state A (loop mode) is related to the fluctuation of special drawing 2, while the number of time reduction fluctuations in specific gaming state B (remaining reservation consumption & time saving mode) is related to special drawing 1. Since it is related to the fluctuation of , in this way, in specific gaming state A, the number of time reduction fluctuations does not decrease due to the fluctuation of special symbol 1, and in specific gaming state B, the number of time reduction fluctuations does not decrease due to the fluctuation of special symbol 2. That's what I do.

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5202 is "N"), the game control device 100
), that is, if the time reduction state (general power support state) continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time reduction variation number update process is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (result of A5202 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the next mode is the remaining hold consumption & time reduction mode (A5202a)
. The current next mode can be determined from, for example, next mode transition information. If the next mode is not the remaining pending consumption & time saving mode (the result of A5202a is "N"), that is, if the time saving state ends in this special figure fluctuation display game, the time saving mode at steps A5203-A5209 ends. Execute processing.

The game control device 100 determines that when the next mode is the remaining hold extinguishment & time saving mode (A5202
The result of a is "Y"), in order to enter the specific game state B (remaining pending consumption & time saving mode) where the number of time reductions related to special figure 1 variation is set in the next special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game The initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number) and the initial value of the total number of time reduction fluctuations are saved. In this way, when the time-saving state related to special symbol 2 variation ends without winning the special symbol variation display game in specific gaming state A (loop mode), new specific gaming state B (remaining pending consumption &
The number of times of time saving regarding the special figure 1 variable display game in time saving mode) is set, and the time saving state itself continues.

[Game board]
FIG. 97A is a front view of the game board 30 in the fourth embodiment. In the first embodiment etc., the normal variable winning device 37 was configured to include the second starting winning hole (starting hole 2, second starting winning area), but in FIG. 97A, the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning hole The opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) is separated.

A normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electric vehicle) having a movable member 37b is arranged directly below the general figure starting gate 34. On the game board 30 (here, the back side of the game board main body 30a), the game balls that have passed through the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the open state are inserted into a first operating port 163 (operating port A), which will be described later.
and the second operation port 167 (operation port B).
is provided. Further, on the front side of the game board 30 (the front side of the game board main body 30a), a first operating port 1 is provided.
A non-electric first opening/closing member 164 (
An opening/closing member A) and a non-electric second opening/closing member 168 (opening/closing member B) that is opened by the load (action) of the game ball passing through the second operating port 167 are provided.

Note that, without being limited to the above, the first opening/closing member 164 and the second opening/closing member 168 are connected to the game control device 10.
It may be an electric opening/closing member controlled by 0. In this case, the second opening/closing member 168
is the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at the position of the second opening/closing member 168, and the guide valve 162 is not provided.

FIG. 97B is a block diagram of the game control system in the fourth embodiment. Game control device 10
0 outputs, via the second output port 134, opening/closing data of the guide valve solenoid 162b that operates (moves) the guide valve 162 from the normal position (initial position) to the operating position. In addition, the second
The opening/closing data from the output port 134 is also output to the test firing test device via the relay board 70.

[Non-electric accessories]
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the configuration of the non-electric accessory 160 in the fourth embodiment. The non-electric accessory 160 includes a non-electric accessory 160a having a non-electric first opening/closing member 164 (opening/closing member A, movable member A, first conversion device), and a non-electric second opening/closing member 168 (opening/closing member B). , a movable member B, and a second conversion device).

If the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is in the open state due to a hit in the normal pattern variable display game, the game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 will be picked up by the movable member 37b and won a normal variable prize. The ball enters the device 37. In addition, the movable member 37b has a width on which only one game ball can be placed, and may be slightly inclined toward the back so that the game ball placed thereon rolls toward the back. After that, the game ball flows down (falls) through a common passage 172 (common flow path) provided on the back side of the game board main body 30a, and reaches a branch part 173. The common passage 172 branches into a first branch passage 174a and a second branch passage 174b at a branch part 173.

When the guide valve 162 (ball sorting means) does not operate and is located at the normal position (indicated by the dotted line), the game ball flows (falls) directly from the common passage 172 to the first branch passage 174a.
Game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage 174a (first passage). When the guide valve 162 operates and is located at the operating position (indicated by a solid line), the game balls from the common passage 172 are guided by hitting the guide valve 162 and flow down to the second branch passage 174b. It can be divided into two branch passages 174b (second passage). Such ball distributing means is well known, and means other than the guide valve 162 may be used.

The game ball enters the first operating port 163 (operating port A) through the first branch passage 174a, enters the second operating port 167 (operating port B) through the second branch passage 174b, After that, gaming machine 1
0 is discharged to the outside.

A load is applied to the lever etc. by the game ball passing through the first operating port 163, and the non-electric first opening/closing member 164
(Opening/closing member A) rotates so as to be opened. In addition, when the upper limit number of game balls (for example, 2 balls) pass through the first opening/closing member 164 and enter the first starting prize opening, a well-known mechanism causes the first
The opening/closing member 164 is closed by rotating in a direction opposite to the opening direction.

In addition, a load is applied to the lever etc. by the game ball passing through the second operating port 167, and the non-electric second opening/closing member 168 (
The opening/closing member B) is rotated so as to be opened. In addition, when the upper limit number of game balls (here, two) pass through the second opening/closing member 168 and enter the second starting prize opening, a well-known mechanism causes the second
The opening/closing member 168 is closed by rotating in a direction opposite to the opening direction.

A game ball that passes through the opened first opening/closing member 164 or second opening/closing member 168 is a game ball that does not pass through the normal figure starting gate 34, or a game ball that does not pass through the normal figure starting gate 34, and even if it passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it does not pass through the normal variable prize winning device 3.
Game balls that do not enter 7 (game balls that are not picked up by the open movable member 37b, movable member 37b
A game ball that normally passes in front of the variable prize winning device 37 while the game ball is closed.

The non-electric accessory 160a includes a first opening/closing member 164 (first conversion device) and a starting port 1 switch 3.
6a-2, a first starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area). The starting port 1 switch 36a-2 can detect a game ball that has passed through the first opening/closing member 164 in an open state, and can generate a starting memory (special figure 1 pending) of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, the starting prize opening 36 at the lower center of the gaming area 32 (below the center case 40) has a starting opening 1 switch 36a-1.
Therefore, there are a total of two starting port 1 switches 36a in the fourth embodiment.

The non-electric accessory 160b includes a second opening/closing member 168 (second conversion device) and a starting port 2 switch 3.
7a (starting port 2, second starting winning area). The starting port 2 switch 37a can detect a game ball that has passed through the second opening/closing member 168 in the open state, and can generate a starting memory (special figure 2 pending) of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37, the first operating port 163 and the second operating port 1
Entering the ball into 67 itself does not generate a prize ball, but only when a game ball is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a-2 or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize ball is awarded from the payout device.

The above-mentioned guide valve 162 (ball sorting means), first opening/closing member 164 (first converting device), and second opening/closing member 168 (second converting device) are used to store the starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 pending). ) or the start memory of the special map 2 variable display game (special map 2 pending) can be selected to be generated by the public power support.

In this embodiment, the normal figure starting gate 34, the movable member 37b, the first opening/closing member 164, and the second opening/closing member 168 are arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30a, while the guide valve 162, the common passage 172, the The first branch passage 174a, the second branch passage 174b, the first operating port 163, the second operating port 167, the starting port 1 switch 36a-2, and the starting port 2 switch 37a are connected to the game board main body 30.
It is placed on the back side of a. Thereby, parts that the player needs to see visually can be arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30a, and parts that give a cluttered impression can be arranged on the back side of the game board main body 30a so that they cannot be seen by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the induction valve 162, the common passage 172, the first branch passage 174a, the second branch passage 174b, the first operating port 163, the second
A part of the operating port 167 may be arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30a, and the wall of the passage (channel wall) may be made transparent so that the movement of the game ball can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a large number of members shown in FIG.
b, first operating port 163, second operating port 167, first opening/closing member 164, second opening/closing member 168,
All or part of the starting port 1 switch 36a-2 and the starting port 2 switch 37a) may be combined into a single unit.

[Characteristics of general map fluctuation display game and general electric power operation]
FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general electric power operation in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 99(A), unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 56), the upper limit of the starting memory number (pending number of common symbols) of the common symbol fluctuation display game is four. In order to do this, FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, the process of step A7706 is deleted from the first embodiment (FIG. 34), so that the number of reserved ordinary cards does not become substantially zero. The other points are the first embodiment (
This is the same as in FIG. 56).

Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, a state with a low probability of public electricity is assumed to be a state without general electricity support (state without support), and a state with a high probability of general electricity is assumed to be a state with general electricity support (state with support). . General power support is performed by making the general power supply at least high probability. For example, when the probability of a common figure is low, the probability of hitting a common figure is 0/251, and when the probability of a common figure is high, the probability of hitting a common figure is 251/251, but the probability is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 99(B), unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 56), the path formed by two rows of obstacle nails 32a between the upper right path 32c in the game area 32 and the normal figure starting gate 34 is not exist. Therefore, the game ball from the passage 32c does not necessarily pass through the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 directly below it, and in addition to the path A of the game ball passing through the normal figure starting gate 34,
The first opening/closing member 164 (opening/closing member A) or the second opening/closing member 16 without passing through the general figure starting gate 34.
There is a path B for the game ball toward 8 (opening/closing member B). Therefore, the upper limit of the starting memory number of the normal pattern variable display game is increased from substantially 0 in the first embodiment to account for the fact that the normal pattern variable display game does not pass through the normal pattern starting gate 34.

FIG. 99(C) shows the normal power release pattern and the operation pattern of the induction valve 162 in the loop mode (specific gaming state A) on the left side, and the normal power release pattern and the operation pattern of the induction valve 162 in the remaining hold extinguishing & time saving mode (specific gaming state B) on the right side. The electrical release pattern and the operation pattern of the induction valve 162 are shown. In addition, in this embodiment, in the general power opening pattern per general map, the general power is opened only once, and there is no latter half opening or interval as in the first embodiment.

The induction valve 162 directs the game ball to the second branch path 1 when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state due to a winning pattern in the loop mode (specific gaming state A, first specific gaming state).
74b and moves to the operating position. The induction valve 162 and the normal variable winning device 37 are operated or opened in synchronization. That is, the operating time when the induction valve 162 is in the operating position is the same as the normal power release time, and the timing when the induction valve 162 moves to the operating position is the same as the timing when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the open state. The timing at which the guide valve 162 returns to the normal position is the same as the timing at which the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes closed. Note that the operation of the guide valve 162 may be delayed from the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37 by the time it takes for the game ball to reach the branch part 173 from the movable member 37b (that is, it does not need to be accurately synchronized).

In order to realize the operation of the induction valve 162 in such a specific game state A, the game control device 100 simultaneously operates the induction valve when saving ON data (or OFF data) in the general electric solenoid output data area. On data (or off data) in the solenoid output data area
(A8411, A8703, A8705, A8709, etc.).

On the other hand, in the remaining reservation extinguishing & time saving mode (specific gaming state B, second specific gaming state), when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state due to a winning pattern, the guiding valve 162 moves the game ball to the first state. It is maintained in a non-operating state so as to be distributed to the first branch passage 174a, and is located at a normal position (non-operating position).

In addition, the normal power release time is short in loop mode (specific game state A), and the remaining hold is exhausted and
It is long in the time saving mode (specific gaming state B). In the loop mode, the normal power release time and the operation time of the induction valve 162 are each about 600 msec, for example. In the remaining hold extinguishing & time saving mode, the normal power release time is, for example, about 2400 msec, and the operating time of the guide valve 162 is 0 sec.

As an example, if the firing speed of game balls is 100 per minute, then 600 msec
The game ball normally reaches the variable prize winning device 37 every time. In this example, 600 in loop mode
During the normal power opening of msec, it is possible to enter the ball into the normal variable prize winning device 37 approximately once, and furthermore, it is possible to enter the ball into the second operating port 167 (operating port B) approximately once, and the second opening/closing. The member 168 (opening/closing member B) can be opened about once at most. In addition, in this example, it is possible to enter the normal variable winning device 37 approximately 4 times during the 2400 msec normal power release in the remaining reservation consumption and time saving mode,
Furthermore, the ball can enter the first operating port 163 (actuating port A) approximately four times, and the first opening/closing member 164 (
The opening/closing member A) can be opened about four times at most. Note that the first opening/closing member 164 will not close unless the upper limit number of game balls (here, two) enter, so the time in the open state is 1200 msec.
To some extent. Therefore, it is rare for the first opening/closing member 164 to open about four times during the 2400 msec normal power opening.

As described above, the guide valve 162 operates to distribute the game balls to the second branch passage 174b in the loop mode (specific gaming state A), and in the remaining reservation extinguishing & time saving mode (specific gaming state B), the guiding valve 162 operates to distribute the game balls to the second branch passage 174b. It operates to distribute the water to the first branch passage 174a. Therefore, depending on the performance mode and game state, which one is mainly generated: the starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 pending) or the starting memory of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 pending). You can choose.

〔Timing chart〕
FIG. 101 shows the gaming state, normal figure probability (normal figure winning probability), normal power state,
Guidance valve status, special map 1 winning (special map 1 starting winning), special drawing 2 winning (special drawing 2 starting winning), special drawing 1 pending number, special drawing 2 pending number, special drawing 1 variable display game (special drawing 1 This is an example of a timing chart showing a special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation). Note that time elapses as you go to the right in the timing chart. The special figure 1 winning due to the game ball detection with the starting port 1 switch 36a-2 and the special drawing 2 winning due to the game ball being detected with the starting port 2 switch 37a are indicated by pulses.

For convenience, in FIG. 101, special drawing 1 winnings and special drawing 2 winnings may be shown to occur at equal intervals, but in reality, the game balls are randomly opened and closed at the first opening and closing. member 164
Or, since the second opening/closing member 168 is reached, the special drawing 1 winning and the special drawing 2 winning do not occur at equal intervals.

In FIG. 101, a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. After the jackpot ending is completed, the probability of the regular pattern changes from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the state becomes a specific game state A (loop mode, time saving mode #1) in FIG. 94.

At the beginning of the specific game state A, the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game (variation of the standard pattern) starts. Since it is a high probability state with a probability of 100% for ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary symbol operation starts, and the ordinary symbol (ordinary fluctuating winning device 37) is opened. In addition, the induction valve 162 also operates from the normal position and moves to the operating position in synchronization with the power supply. In the open state where the general electric current is opened, the game ball that has passed through the general electric current enters the second operating port 167 (operating port B).

When the ball enters the second operating port 167 (operating port B), the second opening/closing member 168 (opening/closing member B) becomes open. After that, a game ball different from the one that entered the second operating port 167 enters the second opening/closing member 1.
68, one special symbol 2 reservation is generated and immediately consumed, the first special symbol 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special symbol 2 reservations becomes 0. The specific game state A (loop mode, time-saving mode #1) with a high probability of regular symbols is maintained until the first special symbol 2 variable display game ends.
In the specific game state A, the general symbol support for generating the special symbol 2 reservation is executed with a high probability of the common symbol.

The second opening/closing member 168 is maintained in the open state until two game balls, which is the upper limit number, are won. When the next game ball passes through the second opening/closing member 168 and enters the second starting prize opening consisting of the starting opening 2 switch 37a, one special drawing 2 hold occurs, and the second opening/closing member 168 mechanically It becomes closed state.

In this embodiment, the number of time-savings related to the special figure 2 fluctuation in specific gaming state A (time-saving mode #1) is 1.
, until the first special figure 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state A (time saving mode #1
) continues. During the continuation of the specific game state A, the normal power release and the operation of the induction valve 162 are performed multiple times, the ball enters the second operating port 167 multiple times, and the second opening/closing member 168 is opened multiple times. Two game balls, which is the upper limit number, are won by opening the second opening/closing member 168 once. Therefore,
During the continuation of the specific game state A (time saving mode #1), up to 4 special drawings 2 reservations can be accumulated, for example.

In FIG. 101, the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of time-savings (first time) in specific gaming state A (time-saving mode #1)
By the end of the variable display game, the specific gaming state A (time saving mode #1) changes from the specific gaming state B.
Transition to (remaining hold consumption & time saving mode). It should be noted that the special game state B may be transitioned to the special game state B through a jackpot (including the one due to winning V) in the symbols Q and M of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special game state A.

In specific gaming state B (remaining reservation consumption & time saving mode), the remaining reservations of the four special symbols 2 that occurred in specific gaming state A are preferentially consumed first, and the second to fifth special symbol 2 variable display games is executed. In the specific game state B, the general symbol support for generating the special symbol 1 hold is executed with a high probability of the regular symbol. During the remaining reserve of special map 2, there is a normal power release without operation of the induction valve 162, and the ball enters the first operation port 163 (operation port A) and opens the first opening/closing member 164 (opening/closing member A).
) is released. Two game balls, which is the upper limit number, are won by opening the first opening/closing member 164 once. The ball can enter the first actuating port 163 multiple times during the open state, and the first opening/closing member 164 is opened multiple times.

In addition, in FIG. 101, it is assumed that opening of the first opening/closing member 164 is started three times during the first normal power opening in the specific game state B. Here, a situation is shown in which the opening of the first opening/closing member 164, which is the last of the three times, starts while the normal power is open, and the special drawing 1 winning occurs twice after the normal power is opened.

In specific gaming state B, after the remaining reserves of the four special figures 2 are extinguished preferentially, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reserve generated by winning the special figure 1 by opening the first opening/closing member 164 starts, and the special figure 1 is A 1-variation display game is started. From then on, while the number of reserved special drawings 2 (remaining number of reserved drawings) is maintained at 0, special drawings 1 holding will be accumulated each time the first opening/closing member 164 is opened, and the special drawings 1 holding will be consumed in the order in which they occur first. The special figure 1 variation display game is executed repeatedly (FIG. 101 shows the special figure 1 variations from 1st to 10th times). The special figure 1 variable display game (first game) is executed in a shorter time than in the normal game state. This gives the player a chance and improves the interest of the game. For example, the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is
is shorter than the normal gaming state, or the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shorter than the shortest variation time (shortest special figure 1 variation time) in the normal gaming state in the specific gaming state B. . In this embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur, the special figure 1 variable display game can be executed up to a third predetermined number of times (99 times) in the specific game state B (remaining pending consumption & time saving mode).

In this way, even if the specific gaming state A ends and all the remaining reservations for the special drawing 2 are exhausted, the special drawing 1 variable display game will be frequently executed by the public power support in the specific gaming state B. Therefore, the player can be given a chance, and the interest in the game is improved. That is, it is possible to please the player who is disappointed because he has used up all the remaining reservations of the special drawing 2 but could not get a small hit (a big win due to a V prize in a small hit), and the interest in the game is improved. On the other hand, in specific game state B, the special figure 2 hold, which is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game, which has a higher small hit probability than the special figure 1 variable display game, does not occur, so the player will not have too much of an advantage. do not have. In addition, specific gaming state B
Since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in a shorter time than the normal game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed more frequently.

[Example of special specifications]
FIG. 102 shows the transition of the gaming state in the fourth embodiment based on the special specifications of the gaming machine 10 (
It is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrated regarding specifications). FIG. 103 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations) corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game with special specifications. 102 and 103 are modified versions of FIGS. 94 and 95 of the first embodiment, and the differences from FIGS. 94 and 95 will be mainly described below.

With special specifications, the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 held (number of special drawings 1 starting memory) is 4, while the upper limit of the number of special drawings 2 holding (number of special drawings 2 starting memory) is 1. Yes (A2905). Also,
The probability of winning a small hit is 299/300 (approximately 1), and the number of time-savings for special map 2 in time-saving mode #1 is 1
It is.

Further, although the time saving mode #2 in the specific game state A does not exist, the small winning probability is 1 instead, so the time saving mode #1 becomes the next continuation confirmation mode in which the specific gaming state is transferred after the jackpot state ends. Furthermore, since the small hit probability is 1, the jackpot (V during the small hit
There is no transition from the specific gaming state A to the specific gaming state B due to the establishment of a predetermined transition condition without passing the jackpot). The specific gaming state A is called a twice-loop mode because it can be repeated twice with a high probability.

Symbols A1 and P, which are the winning types, have the same distribution (selection rate) and time saving times as symbols A and P, but unlike symbols A and P in FIG. 95, they are digested after the end of specific game state A. The specified number of remaining reservations (number of special drawings 2 reservations) is one. For the symbols Q and M, which are the winning types in the loop mode (specific gaming state A), the prescribed remaining number of reservations (special figure 2 reservation number) is one, unlike in FIG. 95. For symbols Q and M, which are the winning types in the remaining pending consumption & time saving mode (specific game state B), the prescribed remaining pending number (special figure 2 pending number) is 0, unlike in FIG. 95.

In addition, in the remaining hold consumption & time saving mode (specific game state B), symbols R and G are not provided, and symbols A1 and P, which are the winning types, are provided instead. A transition is made from the specific game state B to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A by using the remaining reservation and hitting symbols A1 and P in the time-saving mode.

FIG. 104 is a timing chart regarding special specifications, and since it is similar to FIG. 101, the differences from FIG. 101 will be mainly explained.

In specific gaming state A (loop mode, time-saving mode #1), public power support is executed to generate special map 2 reservation with high probability of general map, but the upper limit of the number of special map 2 reservation is 1. Therefore, only one special figure 2 reservation can be accumulated, and the remaining reservation that will be used up after the end of the specific game state A can only be accumulated up to one. Since it is only necessary to accumulate one remaining reservation, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the specific game state A is shorter than that in FIG. 101. Small hit probability is 299/
300 (approximately 1) and the jackpot probability (not a jackpot due to passing V) is 1/300, so
By playing the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific game state A, a small hit, a jackpot due to a V winning during the small winning, or a jackpot not due to a V winning always occurs.

FIG. 104 shows a case where the winning symbols in specific gaming state A (loop mode) are symbols M and Q (not symbols A1 and P). By winning with the symbols M and Q, a transition is made from the specific gaming state A to the specific gaming state B (remaining reservation consumption & time saving mode) via the jackpot state. In addition, in the jackpot state, the normal probability becomes a low probability state.

In specific game state B, the remaining reserve (1 piece) of special figure 2 is used up and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, but since the probability of winning is 1, the special figure 2 variation in specific game state B Depending on the display game, a small hit (a jackpot due to a V win during a small win) or a jackpot (not due to a V win) occurs again. In FIG. 104, when the winning symbols in specific game state B are symbols M and Q (
If the pattern is not A1 or P). By winning with the symbols M and Q, the game transitions from the specific gaming state B to the specific gaming state B again via the jackpot state. In addition, in the jackpot state, the normal probability becomes a low probability state.

As mentioned above, since the sum of the small hit probability and the jackpot probability is 1, a jackpot will definitely occur from both specific gaming state A (loop mode) and specific gaming state B (remaining hold consumption & time saving mode). Ball release speed becomes faster.

In the re-entered specific game state B (remaining hold extinguishment & time saving mode), power supply support for generating special drawing 1 reservation is executed, and power supply release without operation of the induction valve 162 is repeated.
The first opening/closing member 164 (opening/closing member A) is repeatedly opened by the ball entering the first operating port 163 (operating port A). Then, since there is no remaining reservation of special figure 2 (remaining reservation number = 0), immediately after entering the specific game state B, the special figure 1 variable display game is repeatedly executed.

The fourth embodiment has been described above, but with respect to the specific gaming states A and B, the time saving state may be replaced with a variable probability state.

[Actions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) that can execute a first game (special figure 1 variable display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variable display game). , when the result of the first game or the second game is a special result (big hit or small win), a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated. In the gaming machine 10, the first game or the second game
Starting storage means (for example, game control device 100) capable of storing starting memory as the right to execute the game
). The game control means can be generated through special game states, and includes a first specific game state (specific game state A) in which the second game is executed with priority over the first game, and a first specific game state (specific game state A) in which the second game is executed with priority over the first game. Among the plurality of starting memories that occurred during the first specific gaming state in which the second game was executed preferentially, the second starting memory related to the starting memory (remaining pending) in which the second game was not executed during the first specific gaming state.
A second specific gaming state (specific gaming state B) in which the game is executed can be generated. In the second specific game state (specific game state B), the start memory of the second game (special figure 2 pending, special figure 2 start memory) does not occur.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the first specific gaming state (specific gaming state A) ends, the start memory of the second game (remaining reservation of the special figure 2) is further entered into the second specific gaming state (specific gaming state B). )
After all are digested, the start memory of the second game (
Since special figure 2 pending) does not occur, the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed. Therefore, even after the end of the second game in the second specific gaming state, the player can be given a chance, and the interest in the game is improved.

Note that the gaming machine 10 includes a first converting device (first opening/closing member 164 ) may be provided. Then, when a game ball enters the first conversion device (first opening/closing member 164) in the open state, it is possible to generate a first game start memory (special figure 1 hold, special figure 1 start memory). Then, the first game is frequently executed in the second specific game state, further improving the interest of the game.

In the fourth embodiment, the game control means executes the first game in a shorter time than in the normal game state after the second game ends in the second specific game state (specific game state B).

Therefore, in the second specific gaming state (specific gaming state B), the first game is executed in a shorter time than in the normal gaming state, so that the first game is frequently executed even after the second game ends. This increases the interest of the game by giving the player a chance.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, ordinary electricity) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state, and a game ball that has passed through the variable winning device in the open state. Passage (1st
The game ball is changed from the closed state (non-operating state) to the open state (operating state) by the action of the ball distributing means (guidance valve 162) that distributes the balls into the branch passage 174a) and the second passage (second branch passage 174b) and the game balls that have passed through the first passage. a first converting device (first opening/closing member 164) that converts the closed state (non-operating state) into an open state (operating state) by the action of the game ball that has passed through the second passage. (second opening/closing member 168). The game control means is capable of generating a first game starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 hold) when a game ball enters the first converting device in the open state; 2 When a game ball enters the conversion device, the start memory of the second game (
Special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 hold) can be generated.

In such a gaming machine 10, either the starting memory of the first game (special drawing 1 pending) or the starting memory of the second game (special drawing 2 pending) is generated by the conversion operation (general power support) of the variable winning device. or can be selected by the ball sorting means.

In the fourth embodiment, the ball distribution means (guidance valve 162) directs the game ball to the second path (second branch) when the variable prize winning device is converted to the open state in the first specific gaming state (specific gaming state A). The game balls are distributed to the first passage (first branch passage 174a) when the variable winning device changes to the open state in the second specific gaming state (specific gaming state B).

Therefore, depending on the type of specific game state, it is possible to select which of the first game starting memory (special figure 1 pending) and the second game starting memory (special figure 2 pending) is mainly generated. This makes the game more varied and more interesting.

[Fifth embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 115. Note that the configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to fourth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that when a jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state, the game always transitions to the time saving mode (time saving state, general electricity support state) after the jackpot state ends.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 105 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a modification of the game state transition diagram of FIG. 54A of the first embodiment, and the differences from FIG. 54A will be mainly described below.

In FIG. 105, in the specific gaming state C, when a jackpot occurs from the normal gaming state,
This is a gaming state that always occurs after the jackpot ends. In the specific gaming state C, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state (special pattern low probability), but the normal pattern winning probability is in a high probability state (general pattern high probability).

In the specific gaming state C, the number of time reductions is 1 and the remaining number of reservations is 0. Since the remaining number of reservations is 0, there is no transition state after the specific gaming state C. The configuration for setting the remaining number of reservations to 0 will be described later. Note that the number of time saving times may be a predetermined number other than 1. The performance mode of specific game state C is time saving mode #3. In addition, the number of time savings in specific gaming state C is 1, which is small, so when a jackpot from specific gaming state C occurs, it appears to be 2 times in combination with the jackpot from normal gaming state.
The player feels as if he or she has won the jackpot once (number of balls acquired), and the interest in the game increases. Further, the jackpot performance from the normal game state, the time saving mode #3 performance, and the jackpot performance from the specific game state C may be made to have commonality and be made into one continuous performance. The production mode (production stage) during the stay may be displayed in text or as a background on the display screen of the display device 41.

In the specific gaming state C, which tends to be shorter than the normal gaming state because there is no remaining reservation and the number of time-savings is small, the player moves to the specific gaming state A with a specific winning symbol (symbol A). The player feels as if he or she has drawn a specific winning symbol and entered the specific game state A, which increases the sense of self-sufficiency.

Note that the specific gaming state in FIG. 54A is called a specific gaming state A to be distinguished from the specific gaming state C. In the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming state C, it becomes a time-saving state in which special drawing 2 reservation is likely to occur due to general power support. Also in the fifth embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment). Therefore, in the specific game state A and the specific game state C, the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 is used up and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game. In the specific game states A and C, it is recommended that the game ball be shot to the right, aiming at the normal variable winning device 37.

The number of time reductions in specific game state A is 1, and the remaining number of reservations is n. For example, n is an integer smaller than the upper limit value of the number of reserved special figures (here, 4, A2905 in FIG. 9) common to special figures 1 and 2, and is 1 in this embodiment. Since the specific gaming state A is likely to be repeated when the small winning probability is high (for example, repeated X times), the performance mode of the specific gaming state A is set to a loop mode (X times loop mode).

The transition state is the same as that in FIG. 54A, but it does not need to be divided into the mode before the end of normal power release and the mode after the end of normal power release. The number m of special figure 2 remaining reservation fluctuations in the transition state decreases each time the transition state is repeated due to the hit of the symbol J, and is a number equal to or less than n.

Next, transitions from each gaming state will be explained. In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (probability of occurrence of a jackpot due to passing V during a small hit)
The case where is 1/8 (=12.5%) will be explained, but as will be described later, the small hit probability may be other probabilities. Note that a small hit does not have to occur in the special figure 1 variable display game (small hit probability = 0). Also, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the jackpot probability (not a jackpot due to V passage) is 1/3
00, and in the special figure 2 variable display game, the case where the jackpot probability=0 and no jackpot occurs will be explained. In addition, similar to the fourth embodiment, the jackpot probability (V
(not a jackpot due to passing) may be 1/300.

First, in the normal game state, when a jackpot (not due to V winning) occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the only winning symbol is symbol H, and the state always transitions to the specific game state C after the jackpot state ends. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 suspension does not occur and the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed.

In specific gaming state C, when a jackpot (a jackpot due to passing V during a small hit) occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, in the winning symbol A, after the jackpot state ends, specific gaming state A (
A transition is made to the time saving mode #1), and in the case of a winning symbol J, a transition is made to a normal gaming state after the jackpot state ends.

Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the specific gaming state C changes to the normal gaming state. For example, the predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific gaming state C reaches the time saving number (fourth predetermined number of times, for example, one time), or (ii) the specific A fifth predetermined number of times (for example, 1
0 times). Note that if the player plays the game normally, the transition occurs when condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that condition (ii) is met.

In specific gaming state A, when a jackpot (jackpot due to V passing during a small hit) occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, in the winning symbol A, after the jackpot state ends, specific gaming state A (
The time saving mode #1) is returned to, and in the winning symbol J, the state transitions to the transition state after the jackpot state ends.

Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the specific gaming state A is transitioned to a transition state. In addition, in this embodiment, under this transition condition, (iii) completion of normal power disconnection for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is omitted.

In the transition state, when there are no remaining reservations and the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state where the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, in the transition state, a small hit (
When a jackpot state occurs due to passing V during a small hit, the winning symbol J returns to the transition state if there are remaining reservations, and the winning symbol G returns to the transition state after the jackpot state ends. Transition to time saving mode #2 and 99 time saving times are given.

Note that, corresponding to FIG. 105, the time reduction variation number update process in this embodiment includes steps A5200e and A520 from the time reduction variation number update process (FIG. 96B) of the fourth embodiment.
The processes of 0f, A5202a, and A5202b are deleted, and it is determined in step A5200c whether or not the specific gaming state A (loop mode) or the specific gaming state C (time saving mode #3) is selected.

[Time saving number and specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the pattern]
FIG. 106 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations (regular remaining number of reservations), etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol fluctuation display game. The symbol is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either the stop symbol number or the stop symbol pattern.

FIG. 106(A) is related to the winning symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game. Figure 106
The upper figure in (B) is about the winning symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game during the high probability of regular figures (medium time saving), and the lower figure is about the winning symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game during the low probability of ordinary figures. The pattern (
This is related to the winning symbol in the remaining balance).

The symbols A, H, J, and G may be stop symbols determined by jackpot symbol random numbers. The winning symbol in the special figure 1 variable display game is only the symbol H whose distribution (selection rate) is 100%.
The winning symbols of the special symbol 2 variable display game in the high probability of normal symbols are 34% and 6, respectively.
Patterns A and J are 6%. The winning symbols of the special symbol 2 variable display game (the winning symbols in the remaining pendency) during the low probability of normal symbols (while the remaining pendency is being used up) are symbols G and J, which have a distribution of 34% and 66%, respectively.

For symbol H, which is the type of hit, the number of time reductions related to the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot is 1
times, and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (special figure 2 reservation number) that is consumed after the end of the time saving state (specific game state C) is 0. Therefore, the total number of time reductions and remaining reservations is 1 by default.

For pattern A, which is the type of hit, the number of time reductions related to the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot is 1
times, and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (special figure 2 reservation number) that is consumed after the end of the time saving state (specific gaming state A) is n. In this embodiment, n is 1. Therefore, the total number of time reductions and the number of remaining reservations is 1+n by default. In addition, here, the number of special drawings 1 pending (number of special drawings 1 starting memory)
The common upper limit value (A2905 in FIG. 9) of the special figure 2 pending number (special figure 2 starting memory number) is 4 for both.

For symbol J, which is the type of hit, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 0, and the specified remaining number of reservations (special figure 2 reservation The number) is the existing number m of reserved special drawings 2 at that time. The total number of time reductions and remaining reservations is m by default. Note that m is an integer less than or equal to n.

For symbol G, which is the type of hit, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 99, and the specified number of remaining reservations is n
It is individual. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 reservations that can be consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 99+n.

As mentioned above, depending on the game state (performance mode) and the type of winning symbol, you can change the number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations after the jackpot ends, expanding the range of game specifications and playability. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Game board]
FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board 30 in the fifth embodiment. The normal variable prize winning device 37 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration different from that of the first to fourth embodiments.

Immediately below the general figure starting gate 34, a normal variable prize winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, general electricity) having a sliding movable member 37b is arranged. The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a path 170 for game balls in a horizontal U-shape. The starting port 2 switch 37a is arranged at the lower right end of the passage 170. A game ball that enters the passage 170 from above the passage 170 passes through the passage 170 and can be detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a if the movable member 37b is operating. The game balls are ejected from the lower side of the passage 170 when the movable member 37b is not operating. The detailed structure and operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

[General map fluctuation display game, characteristics of general electric power operation, general electric power structure, etc.]
FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating the characteristics of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general electric power operation in the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 56), the upper limit of the starting memory number (the number of pending common symbols) of the common symbol fluctuation display game is four. In order to do this, FIG. 10 of the fourth embodiment
0, in the gate switch monitoring process, step A77 from the first embodiment (FIG. 34)
The process of 06 is deleted, and the number of reserved general drawings is kept from becoming 0.

In addition, the maximum count number (count number upper limit, A7804 in Figure 35) of general electricity is 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings (A2905 in Figure 9) that is commonly defined for special drawing 1 and special drawing 2. or less, for example 1. The count number is the number of inputs to the starting port 2 switch 37a, and when the count number reaches the upper limit of the count number, the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes inactive (
Steps A7804 and A7805 in FIG. 35).

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 100 msec. In addition, it may be set to 100 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 100 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The ordinary figure stop time (ordinary figure display time) is 500 msec. Normal operation time is 1
000 msec. In addition, when providing a fanfare at the time of winning a normal figure, the fanfare time is set to 100 msec.

As shown in FIG. 108(B), unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 56), the path formed by two rows of obstacle nails 32a is between the upper right path 32c in the game area 32 and the normal figure starting gate 34. not exist. Therefore, the game ball from the passage 32c does not necessarily pass through the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 directly below it.

An entrance 171 of a horizontal U-shaped passage 170 is arranged directly below the general pattern starting gate 34, facing the general pattern starting gate 34, and the game ball that has passed through the general pattern starting gate 34 enters the entrance 171 of the passage 170. and flows downward through passage 170. When the movable member 37b is in the operating state, the game ball reaches the starting port 2 switch 37a.

FIG. 108(C) shows a normal current operation pattern. Unless the maximum count number (count number upper limit) of the general electricity is reached, the normal variable prize winning device 37 (normal electricity) operates for the ordinary electricity operating time of 1000 msec. However, if the maximum count (for example, 1) of the general electricity is reached before the normal variable winning device 37 operates, the normal variable winning device 37 becomes inactive as shown by the dotted line (steps A7804 and A7805 in FIG. 35). ). In addition, in this embodiment, in the general power opening pattern per general map, the general power is opened only once, and there is no latter half opening or interval as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between general power operation and special symbol fluctuation. FIG. 109 shows that at the start of specific game states A and C (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot, the special pattern fluctuation display game started with the presence of special pattern 1 pending or special pattern 2 pending is shown in FIG. 23. ) is executed. In the specific game states A and C, the time saving number is 1, and the winning easy state of the general electricity continues only during the special symbol fluctuation time. In specific game states A and C, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34, and when the normal pattern is won, the normal variable prize winning device 37 enters the operating state.

In this embodiment, after the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (general electricity), the normal variable winning device 3
The time TDI during which the number 7 does not operate is set longer than the special figure variation time as the execution time of the special figure variation display game being executed. Thereby, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is activated only once during the special figure variable display game, and can be prevented from being activated more than once. Then, in specific gaming states A and C, it is possible to accurately generate a number of special figure 2 reservations (in this case, 1) corresponding to the number of time reductions or the remaining number of reservations, equal to the maximum count number of the regular electricity. . Instead of the special figure variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed, the maximum special figure variation time may be used.

For example, the time TDI is the remaining bulb processing time (A8708) and the ending time (A8708).
A8903).
In other words, the following holds true: Regular symbol remaining ball processing time + Regular symbol ending time > Special symbol fluctuation time. In addition, if regular figure ending time>special figure variation time, time TDI will always be longer than special figure variation time. For example, when the maximum value of the special figure fluctuation time is 30,000 msec, the standard electric remaining ball processing time is 600 msec, and the general figure ending time is 30,200 msec.

FIGS. 110(A) to 110(C) are cross-sectional views illustrating the operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in detail. The left figure is a sectional view of the normal variable prize winning device 37 parallel to the game board main body 30a, and the right figure is
It is a sectional view of the normal variable prize winning device 37 perpendicular to the game board main body 30a.

The horizontal U-shaped passage 170 of the normal variable prize winning device 37 includes an upper passage 170a, a lower passage 170b, and a left conversion passage 170 that communicates with the upper passage 170a and the lower passage 170b.
It has c. In the lower passage 170b, the game ball is movable in the right direction (first direction). The starting port 2 switch 37a is arranged at the right exit of the lower passage 170b. Lower passage 1
In the upper passage 170a arranged above 70b, the game ball can move in the left direction (second direction), which is opposite to the right direction (first direction). The conversion passage 170c is the upper passage 170a.
The course of the game ball rolling in the left direction (second direction) can be changed to the right direction (first direction) and smoothly guided to the lower passage 170b.

In this way, the passage 170 to the starting port 2 switch 37a can be compactly arranged in a horizontal U-shape, and the space in the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be saved. In addition, when the game ball passes through the upper passage 170a and the lower passage 170b in the same direction, the width of the passage 170 in the left-right direction becomes approximately twice as large.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the specific game states A and C, the movable member 37b enters the operating state due to the winning of the normal pattern, and is located at an operating position protruding forward from the game board main body 30a.
As a result, the movable member 37b becomes the bottom of the lower passage 170b and is disposed adjacent to the starting port 2 switch 37a (detection means), thereby forming a passage to the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), when the starting port 2 switch 37a detects one passing game ball, the count number of the starting port 2 switch 37a increases to the count upper limit (1 here, A7 in FIG. 35).
804), the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes inactive and retracts to the normal position or initial position on the side of the game board main body 30a (back side).

Then, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the game ball that has passed through the starting port 2 switch 37a enters the discharge channel 37d located on the right side of the starting port 2 switch 37a. On the other hand, the game ball that was passing over the movable member 37b, which forms the bottom of the lower passage 170b, falls downward in a state where the bottom appears to have fallen out.

In this way, in specific game states A and C (time saving state), the number of game balls that can pass through the lower passage 170b, which is the passage to the starting port 2 switch 37a (detection means), is set to the count upper limit value (Fig. 35 A7804) can be accurately limited to a predetermined number (here, one) corresponding to A7804). That is, the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 due to one operation does not become larger than a predetermined number, and surplus wins other than the predetermined number (surplus number of counts at the starting port 2 switch 37a) does not occur. In addition, this allows the number of special figure 2 reservations that occur due to one general power operation in specific gaming states A and C (time saving state), regardless of the upper limit of the number of special symbol reservations (here 4). It is possible to limit the count number to an upper limit value (integer n, here 1) that is less than the upper limit value of the number of reserved special drawings.

In addition, the number of special chart 2 reservations that occur due to one general power operation is determined by the special chart 1 and special chart 2 that are commonly defined as the width (width, capacity) of the random number storage area (Figure 9). Upper limit of the number of figures pending (Figure 9
A2905). However, if the upper limit of the number of reserved special symbols is made common among gaming machine models, the development cost of the gaming control program can be reduced. For this reason, the upper limit value of the number of special drawings reserved is fixed, and the upper limit value of the count number regarding the normal variable prize winning device 37 is used to adjust the number of special drawings 2 reserved that occurs due to one general power operation. There is.

Note that the right end of the movable member 37b in the operating state and the starting port 2 switch 37a arranged adjacent to each other
If the distance between the game ball and Since the game ball can be dropped downward, the count number of the starting port 2 switch 37a will not become larger than the count number upper limit value.

[Another example of the structure of general electricity grid]
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the normal variable prize winning device 37. In FIG. 117, the normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a windmill 181, a passage 183, a starting port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member 37.
It has b. A windmill 181 is provided in the middle of a passage 183 for game balls. The windmill 181 includes a storage section 181a that accommodates game balls, and four protrusions 181b that form the four storage sections 181a.
and has.

The accommodating portion 181a can accommodate only one game ball, and the windmill 181 rotates suitably slowly with a predetermined rotational resistance. Thereby, the windmill 181 sends out the game balls flowing down the passage 183 downstream at intervals. A movable member 37b is arranged downstream of the windmill 181,
In the operating state (open state) of the movable member 37b, the game ball hits the movable member 37b and can pass through the lower starting port 2 switch 37a. The movable member 37b enters the non-operating state (closed state) at the moment when the count number of the starting port 2 switch 37a reaches the upper limit value of the count number. In this way, the operated movable member 37b forms a path to the starting port 2 switch 37a (detection means), and the number of game balls that can pass through the path to the starting port 2 switch 37a with one operation of the movable member 37b. can be accurately limited to a predetermined number (here, one) corresponding to the upper limit of the count number.

〔Timing chart〕
FIG. 112 shows the gaming state, the probability of hitting a common figure (probability of winning a common figure), the common figure state,
General power status, special map 1 prize (special map 1 starting prize), special map 2 winning (special map 2 starting prize), number of special diagrams 1 reserved, number of special diagrams 2 reserved, special diagram 1 variable display game (special diagram 1 This is an example of a timing chart showing a special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation). Note that time elapses as you go to the right in the timing chart. The special figure 1 winning by detecting a game ball at the starting port 1 switch 36a and the special drawing 2 winning by detecting a game ball by the starting port 2 switch 37a are indicated by pulses.

FIG. 112 is an example in which the maximum power count is 1 and the remaining reservation number n of the specific gaming state A is 1.

As part of the jackpot state, a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown. The jackpot ending due to the jackpot from the normal gaming state is completed, and the normal probability is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the specific gaming state C (time saving mode #3) shown in FIG. 105 is entered.

At the beginning of the specific game state C, the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game (variation of the standard pattern) starts. Since it is in a high probability state with a probability of 100% for ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol is won and the operation of the ordinary symbol (ordinary fluctuating winning device 37) starts. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, since the ordinary figure stop time is long at 500 msec, the ordinary figure stop between the ordinary figure fluctuation and the ordinary figure hit state is shown without omitting it.

During the operation of the public power station, there is a special drawing 2 prize, the special drawing 2 is put on hold, and the special drawing 2 variation display game (special drawing 2 variation) is started. The variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state C (special figure 2 variation time) is executed in a shorter time than the regular figure variation time. In addition, in specific game state C, special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1
Even when the variation) starts, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 variation time) is executed in a shorter time than the regular figure variation time. Since the specific game state C (time saving state) ends with the end of one special figure 2 variation display game, the next general figure variation is not executed in the specific game state C, and the second general figure There is no action.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation time) in specific gaming state C is longer than the regular symbol fluctuation time of the regular symbol fluctuation display game (third game) in specific gaming state C. Since it is executed in a short time, the number of special drawings 2 pending at the end of specific gaming state C is 0,
In the specific game state C, the remaining number of reservations can be set to 0. Alternatively, as shown by the dotted line, the remaining number of reservations can be reduced in the specific gaming state C by executing the time saving end process that ends the time saving state at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state C. Definitely 0
(described later in FIGS. 114 and 115).

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which a jackpot occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game with the winning symbol A in the specific gaming state C, and the state changes to the specific gaming state A.

In the jackpot state, the probability of a normal figure is low, but in the specific game state A, the probability of a common figure becomes a high probability state again. At the beginning of the specific game state A, the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the fluctuation of the normal pattern starts. Since it is in a high probability state with a probability of 100% for ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol is won and the operation of the ordinary symbol (ordinary fluctuating winning device 37) starts. During the operation of the public power station, there is a special drawing 2 prize, the special drawing 2 is put on hold, and the special drawing 2 variation display game (special drawing 2 variation) is started.

The variation time (special figure 2 variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game in specific gaming state A is executed in a longer time than the regular figure variation time and the special figure 2 variation time in specific gaming state C. Then, during the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific game state A, the special figure 2 is won again and the special figure 2 reservation occurs as a remaining reservation (number of remaining reservations=1).

After that, in the specific game state A, either a jackpot (V winning with a small hit) in the special figure 2 variable display game occurs with the winning symbol J, or the special figure 2 variable display game misses and one time-saving number ends. Then, the system transitions to a transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). Then, in the transition state, a special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation is executed.

FIG. 113 shows that in the specific game state A of FIGS. 105 and 112 (here, the number of remaining reservations n = 1), a jackpot in the special symbol 2 variable display game occurs with the winning symbol A, and the specific game state A is entered again. Indicate the case.

After the jackpot state ends, the specific gaming state A loops again due to one special figure 2 reservation (remaining reservation) carried over from the specific gaming state A (predetermined type of specific gaming state) before the jackpot state
The special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation) starts at . If the normal power line (normal variable winning device 37) operates more than once during this special figure 2 variable display game, there is a possibility that the remaining number of reservations in the specific game state A will exceed 1. Therefore, in order to limit the operation of the general electric field to one time in the specific game state A again, as explained in FIG. 109, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, The total time and general ending time of the special map 2 in progress
Set longer than the special figure 2 variation time of the variable display game (remaining electric ball processing time + normal figure ending time > special figure 2 variation time). Alternatively, the general pattern ending time is made longer than the special pattern variation time (common pattern ending time>special pattern 2 variation time). The special figure 2 variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed may be replaced with the maximum special figure 2 variation time.

In specific game state A again, after one general electricity operation causes one remaining hold, for example, a jackpot (V prize in a small jackpot) with the winning symbol J in the special pattern 2 variable display game occurs. Or special map 2
When the fluctuating display game ends and one time saving number ends, the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode)
Transition to.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol 1 variation start processing according to the fifth embodiment. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game. Note that the same steps (A3401 to A3407) as in FIG. 12 are given the same step numbers and their explanations will be omitted.

After step A3407, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the time saving mode #3 (specific gaming state C) (A3408). For example, whether or not it is time saving mode #3 can be determined from the production mode number. If it is currently time saving mode #3 (specific gaming state C) (result of A3408 is "Y"), it is determined whether the time saving end variation number condition for transitioning to the normal gaming state is satisfied (A3409).

The time saving end variation number condition here is the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display The total number of executions (number of fluctuations) of the game and the special figure 2 variable display game) reaches a fifth predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). In addition, the case where this time-saving end variation number condition is satisfied means that in the specific game state C, the carried-over special symbol 1 reservation is exhausted, or the player is left-handed even though he should be playing right-handed. This is a special case where special drawing 1 winnings continue to occur. When the player hits the right hand in specific game state C, the number of time savings is achieved by executing the special figure 2 variable display game, the transition condition (i) is satisfied, and the time savings ends. In addition, in determining this time-saving end variation number condition, the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game includes the amount of the special figure 1 variation display game that is about to start.

The game control device 100 executes a time saving end process to end the time saving state (general power high probability state, general power support state) when the time saving end variation number condition is satisfied (result of A3409 is "Y"). The time saving end process is, for example, the same as the process of steps A5203 to A5209 of the time reduction variation number update process (FIGS. 26 and 96B), and the probability information command (time saving end) is prepared as a production command and the production command setting process is performed. or save low probability flags in the general game mode flag area.

In this way, in the specific game state C, when the time-saving end variation number condition (end condition) is satisfied, it is made difficult or impossible to convert the general electricity to the operating state at the start of the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game. Executes time-saving termination processing. Then, in the specific game state C after the jackpot state generated by the special figure 1 variable display game (first game) in the normal game state, the remaining reservations are not accumulated (the number of remaining reservations=0).

If the game control device 100 is not currently in time saving mode #3 (specific game state C), (A3
408 result is "N"), or if the time saving end variation number condition is not satisfied (A3409
The result is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, in specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2), the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1
When the total number of executions (number of fluctuations) of the variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game) reaches the second predetermined number of times, when the variation of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game ends ( In the time reduction variation number update process (when displaying a stop display), a time reduction end process is executed to make it difficult or impossible to convert the general electricity to the operating state (same as steps A5203 to A5209 in FIG. 96B). As a result, in the specific game state A after the jackpot state generated by the special figure 2 variable display game (second game), the remaining reservations are accumulated (remaining reservation number=n, 1 in this embodiment).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing according to the fifth embodiment. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game. Note that the same steps (A3401 to A3407) as in FIG. 13 are given the same step numbers and their explanations are omitted.

After step A3507, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the time saving mode #3 (specific gaming state C) (A3508). For example, whether or not it is time saving mode #3 can be determined from the production mode number. If it is currently time saving mode #3 (specific gaming state C) (result of A3508 is "Y"), it is determined whether the time saving end variation number condition for transitioning to the normal gaming state is satisfied (A3509). The time-saving end variation number condition here is such that the number of execution times of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific gaming state C of the above-mentioned predetermined transition condition (i) for transitioning from the specific gaming state C to the normal gaming state in FIG. 105 is shortened. The number of times (fourth predetermined number of times, for example, one time) is reached. In addition, in determining this time-saving end variable number condition, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game includes the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is about to be started.

The game control device 100 executes a time saving end process to end the time saving state (general power high probability state, general power support state) when the time saving end variation number condition is satisfied (result of A3409 is "Y"). The time saving end process is, for example, the same as the process of steps A5203 to A5209 of the time reduction variation number update process (FIGS. 26 and 96B), and the probability information command (time saving end) is prepared as a production command and the production command setting process is performed. or save low probability flags in the general game mode flag area.

In this way, in the specific game state C, when the time-saving end variation number condition (end condition) is satisfied, it is made difficult or impossible to convert the general electricity to the operating state at the start of the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game. Execute time-saving termination processing (see also FIG. 112). Then, in the specific game state C after the jackpot state generated by the special figure 1 variable display game (first game) in the normal game state, the remaining reservations are not accumulated (the number of remaining reservations=0).

If the game control device 100 is not currently in time saving mode #3 (specific game state C), (A3
508 result is "N"), or if the time saving end variation number condition is not satisfied (A3509
The result is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, in specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) after the jackpot state generated by the special figure 2 variable display game (second game), the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is the number of time savers (first game). When the predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time) is reached, it is made difficult to convert the general electricity to the operating state by the time reduction variation number update process at the end of the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (when the display is stopped). Execute time-saving termination processing to prevent
9). As a result, in the specific game state A after the jackpot state generated by the special figure 2 variable display game (second game), the remaining reservations are accumulated (remaining reservation number=n, 1 in this embodiment).

The fifth embodiment has been described above, but with respect to the specific gaming states A and C, the time saving state may be replaced with a variable probability state.

[Actions and effects of the fifth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure fluctuation display game), and the result of the game is a special result (big hit or small hit). In some cases, special gaming conditions advantageous to the player can be generated. In the gaming machine 10,
It is equipped with a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electricity) that can be converted into an operating state and a non-operating state. The variable prize winning device includes a detection means (for example, the starting port 2 switch 37a) that can detect the game ball.
and a movable member (for example, movable member 37b) which forms a passage to the detection means of the game ball by operating in the operating state and is disposed adjacent to the detection means.

In such a gaming machine 10, the number of game balls that can pass through the path to the detection means (for example, the starting port 2 switch 37a) is set to a predetermined number in the operating state of the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric power). (upper limit of count number, for example, 1). In other words, in the number of winnings to the variable winning device, surplus winnings other than the predetermined number (surplus winning count number)
does not occur. In addition, by this, the number of game start memories (number of special drawings 2 reservations, number of time reductions + remaining number of reservations) generated by the operation of the variable prize winning device can be calculated as the width (width, capacity) of the random number storage area (Figure 9). Regardless of a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) secured in advance, the count number can be accurately limited to an upper limit value (integer n, here 1) that is less than the predetermined upper limit value.

In the fifth embodiment, after the variable winning device operates, the game control means controls the time during which the variable winning device does not operate (the sum of the remaining ball processing time and the ending time, or the ending time) of the game being executed (especially the ending time). It is possible to set the execution time to be longer than the execution time of the figure fluctuation display game).

Therefore, during the game (special figure variable display game), the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electricity) is activated only once, and can be prevented from being activated more than once. Then, in a specific gaming state, the number of time reductions and the number of remaining reservations (in some cases, the number equivalent to the total of these)
The starting memory (for example, special drawing 2 pending) can be made equal to the maximum count number of the variable prize winning device to generate it accurately.

In the fifth embodiment, the game control means, after a special game state (for example, a jackpot state),
A specific gaming state (specific gaming state A) in which the variable prize winning device is easier to convert into an operating state than a normal gaming state.
, C) to limit the number of game balls that can pass through the path to the detection means (for example, the starting port 2 switch 37a) to a predetermined number (count number upper limit) in a specific game state.

Therefore, it is possible to suitably limit (adjust) the number of starting memories (pending) that occur in specific gaming states (specific gaming states A, C).

In the fifth embodiment, the game (special figure variable display game) includes a first game (special figure 1 variable display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variable display game). The game control means can generate the first special game state after the normal game state by the first game, and in a specific game state (specific game state C) after the special game state generated by the first game, the end condition is set. If established, a process that makes it difficult to convert the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electricity) to the operating state at the start of the fluctuation of the first game or the second game (it is more difficult to convert than the normal gaming state or special gaming state) Execute the time-saving termination process). The game control means operates a variable prize winning device (normally A process for making it difficult to convert the variable winning device 37 (fluctuating prize winning device 37, general electricity) to an operating state (a time-saving termination process for making it more difficult to convert than a normal game state or a special game state) is executed.

Therefore, in the specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) after the special gaming state (after the jackpot state) that occurred in the first game (special figure 1 variable display game), the remaining reservations that will be consumed in the specific gaming state are not accumulated. (remaining number of reservations = 0). On the other hand, the remaining reserves can be accumulated in the specific gaming state (specific gaming state A) after the special gaming state (after the jackpot state) generated by the second game (special figure 2 variable display game). Number = n, 1 in this embodiment). Therefore, the gameplay changes and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to end a specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) in a single period of time, and if a special gaming state (jackpot state) occurs twice with a specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) in between, two The player feels as if the balls put out (the number of balls acquired) in a particular game state have been obtained in one special result (for example, a jackpot), and the interest in the game is improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the game (special figure variable display game) includes a first game (special figure 1 variable display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variable display game). The game control means can generate the first special game state after the normal game state by the first game, and in a specific game state (specific game state C) after the special game state generated by the first game, the first special game state can be generated by the first game. Alternatively, the execution time of the second game (special figure fluctuation time) is made shorter than the execution time of the third game (the regular figure fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation display game) for converting the variable prize winning device into the operating state.

Therefore, in the specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) after the special gaming state (after the jackpot state) that occurred in the first game (special figure 1 variable display game), the remaining reservations that will be consumed in the specific gaming state are not accumulated. (remaining number of reservations = 0). Therefore, it is possible to end the specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) in a single period of time, and when the special gaming state (jackpot state) occurs twice with the specific gaming state (specific gaming state C) in between, Two balls in a specific game state (
The player feels as if the number of balls acquired was obtained by one special result (for example, a jackpot), and the interest in the game increases. Furthermore, the gameplay is changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the game ball passes in the first direction (for example, rightward) through the passage to the detection means (for example, the starting port 2 switch 37a) as the lower passage (lower passage 170b). The gaming machine 10 is arranged above the lower passage, and includes an upper passage (upper passage 170a) through which game balls pass in a second direction (for example, to the left) opposite to the first direction, and an upper passage and a lower passage. It includes a conversion passage that communicates with the passage and changes the traveling direction of the game balls that have passed through the upper passage from the second direction to the first direction.

Therefore, the passage (passage 170) to the detection means (for example, the starting port 2 switch 37a) can be compactly organized into a horizontal U-shape (folded and stacked), and the space in the gaming area 32 of the gaming board 30 can be saved. You can save money.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to replace the short time state with a variable probability state. For example, it is also possible to combine multiple embodiments. Furthermore, for example, the present invention may be applied to other types of gaming machines (
It can also be applied to slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims are included.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. In a slot machine, the ball payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is
The ratio of the number of medals paid out by various bonuses to the number of medals paid out in a specified period (
%).

10 Game machine 25 Production button 30 Game board 32 Game area 34 Normal figure starting gate 36 1st starting prize opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
37a Start port 2 switch 37b Movable member 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area 86 (V winning opening)
100 Game control device (main board)
162 Guide valve 164 First opening/closing member 168 Second opening/closing member 170a Upper passage 170b Lower passage 174a First branch passage 174b Second branch passage 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a game control means capable of executing a game, and a performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game,
The game control means is
A normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
A first variable display game can be executed as the game based on the first starting memory,
A second variable display game can be executed as the game based on the second starting memory,
The gaming value given to the player in response to the result of the first variable display game in the normal gaming state is such that the number of executions of the specific gaming state is a first value;
The gaming value given to the player in response to the result of the second variable display game in the specific gaming state has a first value corresponding to the number of times the specific gaming state is executed;
The second starting memory occurs in the specific gaming state, and the gaming value given to the player corresponding to the result of the second variable display game during a predetermined period after the end of the specific gaming state is The number of executions of is a second value different from the first value,
When a first condition is satisfied that the total number of times of the first variable display game and the second variable display game during the specific gaming state becomes a first number of times, the specific gaming state is ended;
The performance control means is
A specific performance mode can be started in the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second starting memory does not occur in the specific performance mode, the predetermined performance to be performed corresponding to a predetermined period after the end of the specific game state is not executed.

Images